Soil United States

Conservation Department of
Service Agriculture

National
Engineering
Manual

Title 210
Foreword

This manual furnishes the policy needed to provide uniform high

quality in SCS engineering. It is essential that SCS provide
consistent quality engineering and that conservation practices
be of the appropriate level of quality to insure proper
functioning, with the planned maintenance, throughout their
design life.

Quality does not depend on these policy statements alone, but on

engineers and other SCS employees who possess a sound knowledge
of engineering principles and who apply this policy with good
judgment.

The policy in this National Engineering Manual is the result of

the experience of many people over many years. Policy is
dynamic and must continue to evolve and adapt to new technology,
materials, and experiences. As we continue to examine this
policy in the light of new developments, we must be satisfied
that our decisions are appropriate and will strengthen and
enhance engineering. To do so will uphold our tradition of
quality engineering.

NORM A. BERG,
Chief
 NATIONAL ENGINEERING MANUAL
PRIMARY TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL

500 INTRODUCTION
501 AUTHORIZATIONS
502 RESPONSIBILITIES
503 SAFETY
504 INVESTIGATIONS, STUDIES AND REPORTS
505 NON-NRCS ENGINEERING
506 TECHNICAL MATERIALS

MANAGEMENT

510 PLANNING
511 DESIGN
512 CONSTRUCTION
513 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

APPLICATIONS

520 STREAMS AND CHANNELS

521 WATER QUALITY
522 WATER SUPPLY AND CONSERVATION
523 IRRIGATION
524 DRAINAGE
525 RESTORATION
526 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT
527 WETLANDS
528 DAMS
529 AIR QUALITY

TECHNOLOGY

530 HYDROLOGY
531 GEOLOGY
532 BIOLOGICAL ENGINEERING
533 SOILS ENGINEERING
534 HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING
535 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE
536 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING
537 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

i
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, March 1997)
 NATIONAL ENGINEERING MANUAL
PRIMARY TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUPPORT

540 FIELD SURVEYS

541 DRAFTING AND DRAWINGS
542 SPECIFICATIONS
543 MATERIALS
544 EQUIPMENT
545 ENGINEERING QUALITY ASSURANCE

ii
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, March 1997)
 SUBCHAPTER A - GENERAL

PART 500 - INTRODUCTION

500.00 General.
500.01 Scope.
500.02 Abbreviations.

PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS

SUBPART A – REVIEW AND APPROVAL

501.00 General.
501.01 Scope.
501.02 Technical quality.
501.03 Compliance of engineering work with laws and
regulations.
501.04 Engineering job approval authority.
501.05 Engineering job review.
501.06 Engineering work reviewed for other agencies.
501.07 Classification of engineering jobs.
501.08 Exhibit 1 Engineering job classifications that utilize
controlling factors.
501.09 Exhibit 2 Engineering job approval authority.

SUBPART B - REPAIR AND REHABILITATION

501.20 General.
501.21 Scope.
501.22 Applicable standards.
501.23 Dams installed without NRCS assistance.
501.24 Special conditions.

SUBPART C – VARIANCE AND CHANGES

501.30 General.
501.31 National Handbook of Conservation Practices (NHCP).
501.32 Channel stability criteria.

iii
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 SUBPART D – ENGINEERING WORK ON NATIONAL FORESTS

501.40 General.
501.41 Scope.
501.42 Water storage or transmission structures built on
national forests.

SUBPART E - ASSISTANCE ON SHORE EROSION CONTROL

501.50 General.
501.51 Scope
501.52 Coordination with Corps of Engineers.
501.53 Requirements for assistance.

SUBPART F - SNOW SURVEYS AND WATER SUPPLY FORECASTING

501.60 General.
501.61 NRCS Responsibilities.

SUBPART G - EXHIBITS

501.70 NRCS-FS Memorandum of Understanding.

501.71 Flow chart for engineering activities between NRCS and
FS.
501.72 Corps of Engineers Regulation 1110-2.

PART 502 - ENGINEERING RESPONSIBILITIES

(Reserved)

PART 503 - SAFETY

SUBPART A – ENGINEERING ACTIVITIES AFFECTING UTILITIES

503.00 General.
503.01 Scope.
503.02 General considerations.
503.03 Investigations.
503.04 Buried utilities.
503.05 Checklist.
503.06 State laws.

iv
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 SUBPART B - PUBLIC SAFETY AT STRUCTURE SITES

503.10 General.
503.11 Scope.
503.12 Recommended safety measures.
503.13 Maintenance of steep slopes.

SUBPART C – SAFETY DURING GEOLOGIC INVESTIGATIONS

503.20 General.
503.21 Scope.
503.22 Hazard potential.

SUBPART D – DAM SAFETY

503.50 Involvement with dams.

503.51 USDA involvement.
503.52 NRCS Dam Safety Officer.
503.53 Interagency involvement.
503.54 Other (non-governmental) involvement.
503.55 NRCS/State relationships.
503.56 Responsibility for dams.
503.57 NRCS assistance.
503.58 Key factors.
503.59 Interim assistance.
503.60 USDA Dam Safety Committee.

PART 504 - SPECIAL INVESTIGATIONS, STUDIES, AND REPORTS

SUBPART A – PROBLEMS AND DEFICIENCIES

504.00 General.
504.01 Scope.
504.02 Reporting problems, deficiencies, and failures.
504.03 Committee assignments.
504-04 Procedures.
504.05 Engineering report.
504.06 Report review and acceptance.
504.07 Release and distribution of reports.

SUBPART B - Emergency Spillway Performance

504.10 General.

v
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
504.11 Scope.
504.12 Reporting major flows.
504.13 Assignments.
504.14 Procedures.
504.15 Report.
504.16 Review and approval.

SUBPART C – SEDIMENTATION SURVEYS OF SELECTED RESERVOIRS

504.20 General.
504.21 Survey plans.
504.22 Procedures.
504.23 Reports.

SUBPART D – FIELD TRIALS AND EVALUATIONS

504.30 General.
504.31 Scope.
504.32 Approval procedures.
504.33 Study plan.
504.34 Reports.

SUBPART E – TECHNICAL MANUSCRIPT PEER REVIEW

504.40 General.
504.41 Scope.
504.42 Policy.

PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

SUBPART A - INTRODUCTION

505.00 General.
505.01 State criteria.
505.02 Exchange of technical services between government
agencies.
505.03 Review of work performed by consultants and suppliers.

SUBPART B – USE OF NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

505.10 Nonproject activities.

505.11 Project activities.
505.12 River basin studies.
505.13 Engineering services not provided by NRCS.

vi
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 SUBPART C - CRITERIA

505.20 Nonproject activities.

505.21 Project activities.

SUBPART D - PROCEDURES

505.30 Engineering services, contracts, and agreements.

505.31 Selection of non-NRCS engineering services.
505.32 Responsibility for engineering services performed.
under engineering services, contracts, and agreements.

SUBPART E - EXHIBITS

505.40 Exchange of technical services between NRCS and FS.

505.41 Memorandum of Understanding between LICA and NRCS.
505.42 Conservation contractor - sample letter.
505.43 Landowner use of a consultant – sample letter.

PART 506 – TECHNICAL MATERIALS

506.00 General.
506.01 Definition of Terms.
506.02 Organization of permanent materials.
506.03 Metrication.
506.04 Developing NEH materials.
506.05 Distribution of materials within NRCS.
506.06 Distribution of materials outside NRCS.

vii
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 500 - INTRODUCTION

SUBCHAPTER A - GENERAL

PART 500 - INTRODUCTION

500.00 General

(a) The purpose of this manual is to present engineering

policy clearly and completely so that engineering activities can
be carried out efficiently.

(b) These policies are provided for the purpose of

establishing and maintaining technical excellence in engineering
which results from the knowledge of engineering principles, the
ability to apply the knowledge effectively, and to coordinate an
interdisciplinary team approach to the engineering activity.

500.01 Scope.

(a) It is NRCS policy to maintain a viable engineering

staff, trained and experienced in the type of work needed to
support the NRCS natural resources conservation program. NRCS
recognizes that there will be situations for which sufficient
staff or expertise is not available. Under these conditions,
contracting is an alternative for expediting engineering
activities. As such, all engineering work performed by or for
NRCS is to be in conformance with the requirements stated in this
manual.

(b) The policies stated in this manual apply to engineering

work performed for others under cooperative working agreements,
in memoranda of understanding, or under any other agreement
entered into by NRCS.

500.02 Abbreviations.

The following abbreviations are used:

NEM - National Engineering Manual

500-1
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 500 - INTRODUCTION

NEH - National Engineering Handbook

NHCP - National Handbook of Conservation Practices

RO - Regional Office

CED - Conservation Engineering Division

NRCS - Natural Resources Conservation Service

USDA - United States Department of Agriculture

500-2
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS

SUBPART A – REVIEW AND APPROVAL

501.00 General.

(a) Conservation engineering practices have the potential,

upon failure or malfunction, to affect public health and
safety, cause loss of life, and/or cause significant
property damage, depending on the size, location, and
complexity of work. For this reason the practice of
engineering is regulated by individual states through
professional engineering certification as described in the
General Manual 210-402.

(b) The development of engineering plans or engineering

aspects of practices requires that the approving engineer be
responsible for obtaining and integrating the needed
assistance from an interdisciplinary team under the rules of
professional conduct.

(c) Engineering job approval authority is the quality

assurance process that ensures adequate considerations by
competent NRCS employees to plan, design, and install
conservation practices that, with proper operation and
maintenance, will perform the intended functions for the
planned life of the practices. The purposes of engineering
job approval authority are: to maintain the accountability
required by state certification of professional engineers;
to provide competent and functional engineering in planning,
design, and construction of conservation practices; and to
maintain the credibility and public trust of NRCS
engineering.

(d) All conservation engineering practice designs will be

approved by a qualified person who has appropriate
engineering job approval authority. Others may do some or
all of the work under the direction of the qualified person.
A conservation engineering practice is a conservation
practice included in the National Handbook of Conservation
Practices with engineering listed as the lead discipline.

501.01 Scope.

(a) Each NRCS employee providing engineering services is

to be evaluated and assigned an appropriate engineering job
approval authority based upon training, experience, and
demonstrated competence. No more than one level of review
is required.

(b) Non-NRCS employees operating under the technical

supervision of an NRCS employee and providing engineering
services are to be evaluated and assigned an appropriate
engineering job approval authority based upon training,
experience, and demonstrated competence. The engineering
job

(210-V, NEM, Amend. 22, Oct. 1995)

501-1
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS

approval authority assigned, in addition to being based on

technical competence, is dependent upon employment status as
described in the following paragraphs.

(1) Non-NRCS employees who are federal employees may be

assigned engineering job approval authority on the same
basis as NRCS employees.

(2) Non-NRCS employees who are licensed to practice

engineering in the same state in which the engineering
services are offered may be assigned engineering job
approval authority on the same basis as for NRCS employees.

(3) Non-NRCS employees who are not federal employees

and are not licensed to practice engineering in the state in
which the engineering services are offered may be assigned
engineering job approval authority when such authority does
not conflict with state law.

These employees include volunteers, employees of

cooperative organizations or units of government, and other
partners performing public services similarly to NRCS
employees and therefore appearing to the public as NRCS
employees.

Policy on the use of non-NRCS engineering services is

contained in 505.

501.02 Technical Quality.

Engineering designs and installation assistance are to

provide for engineering conservation practices that:

(a) Function as planned;

(b) Exhibit sound engineering principles;

(c) Perform safely;

(d) Are cost effective installations for which initial,

operation, maintenance, and removal or replacement costs are
considered;

(e) Meet the requirements of site specific conditions

within an ecosystem;

(f) Comply with NRCS and industry established practice

standards, technical criteria, and policies

(210-V, NEM, Amend. 22, Oct. 1995)

501-2
 SUBPART A – REVIEW AND APPROVAL

501.03 Compliance of engineering work with laws and

regulations.

(a) Engineering work is to meet applicable requirements of

federal, state, and local laws, regulations, and codes.
This is for all work that involves engineering activities
during planning, design, construction, operations,
maintenance, modification, rehabilitation, and removal or
replacement.

(b) Registered professional engineers are encouraged to

seal designs, construction plans, reports, and other
engineering documents.

(c) The State Conservation Engineer is to develop policy

and procedures for approving and sealing engineering plans:

(1) For works designed by NRCS and by non-NRCS employees

working as partners with NRCS;

(2) Which are required to be sent to regulatory agencies

for review, approval, or the granting of permits; and

(3) In states that have laws requiring the cooperating

local organization to have plans for public works prepared
under the direct supervision of a registered professional
engineer.

501.04 Engineering job approval authority.

(a) The State Conservation Engineer is delegated the

engineering job approval authority for all engineering jobs.
Engineering jobs are classified with respect to hazard
potential, complexity, and size, as shown in Exhibit 1
(501.08). The hazard potential is defined in 503. The type
of review required varies by engineering job class as shown
in 501.05.

(b) In-state engineering job approval authority (Classes I

through V).

(1) Conservation engineering practices that are

classified as Classes I through V jobs must be low hazard
potential (such as class A dams or class III dikes) as
defined in §503. For the practices with the potential for
higher risk, limitations on selected controlling factors and
hazard potential are to be used to further define the
engineering jobs by higher classes.

(2) Each State Conservation Engineer is to develop

policy and procedures for approval of engineering work
carried out in the state. These are to apply to every
individual providing

(210-V, NEM, Amend. 22, Oct. 1995)

501-3
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS

engineering services, both NRCS employees and non-NRCS

employees operating under NRCS technical supervision. The
procedure used to assign engineering job approval authority
for non-NRCS employees is to be the same as that used for
NRCS employees, except as noted in 501.01(b).

(3) Engineering job approval authority is to be

delegated within a state according to the classes of jobs
established in the state engineering job approval authority
chart. Assigned individual engineering job approval
authority is to be developed considering the employee's
training, experience, and demonstrated competence. The
practices applicable to the location are to be considered in
assigning engineering job approval authority. Exhibit 2
(501.09) is a guide for developing engineering job approval
authority charts. The practices listed are examples only.
The State Conservation Engineer is to select, from Class V
jobs, job type, controlling factors, units, and engineering
job approval authority breakdowns appropriate for the
conditions in the state. For the practices noted in Exhibit
1 (501.08), the same controlling factors should be use(d)
Additional factors may be selected if needed.

(4) It is recommended that Professional Engineers

registered in the state and working under NRCS technical
supervision be routinely delegated either Class IV or V
engineering job approval authority.

(5) The engineer technically responsible for engineering

work (e.g., field or area engineer) is to delegate the
engineering job approval authority for those working in her
or his assigned are(a) The individual’s supervisor is to
concur in the delegation of the engineering job approval
authority. The engineering job approval authority
delegation is not to be greater than that held by the
delegating engineer. Individual engineering job approval
authority is to be reviewed annually for those in their
present position for less than three years and updated as
necessary, but at least every three years for all others.

(6) The state engineering job approval authority chart

is to be reviewed and concurred in by the Director of the
Conservation Engineering Division.

(c) State Conservation Engineer's engineering job approval

authority (Classes VI through VIII).

(1) The design review and, for Class VIII jobs,

concurrence will be accomplished prior to engineering job
approval by the State Conservation Engineer in accordance
with 501.05. Design review encompasses the job design
documentation, to include the design folder, construction

(210-V, NEM, Amend. 22, Oct. 1995)

501-4
 SUBPART A – REVIEW AND APPROVAL

drawings, specifications, design report, quality assurance

plan, operation and maintenance plan, and, when applicable,
the instrumentation plan and contract provisions. See 511
for documentation requirements. Review also applies to all
significant changes required during construction.

(2) Class VI engineering job approval authority may be

delegated to NRCS Professional Engineers registered in the
state if they have demonstrated competence for a particular
practice and if the Director of the Conservation Engineering
Division has determined that the state staff has the review
capability for the job.

(3) Each State Conservation Engineer is to develop

procedures for the design, review, and processing of Class
VI through VIII jobs. This procedure is to indicate the
staff specialists who are to participate in the design.

(d) Engineering job approval authority for additional

work.

The engineering job approval authority for work to be

done on an existing practice or structure is to be
classified in accordance with procedures for classifying
that practice or structure as listed in 501.07. This
determination of engineering job approval authority applies
to any additional work such as repair, modification,
rehabilitation, or removal. The classification is
determined by the highest category of any single most-
limiting factor for the job.

(e) Documentation of design review and engineering job

approval.

Review and approval of an engineering job, comprising the

design, drawings, and specifications, is to be accomplished
in one of the following ways:

(1) Signatures are to be placed on the design

documentation/report and the cover or first sheet of the
construction drawings, or

(2) Signatures are to be placed on an accompanying

memorandum that describes the specific job and scope
(including design documentation/report and plans).

(f) Associated plans and specifications.

Interdisciplinary design may produce associated drawings

and specifications for erosion control, vegetative planting,
final grading, and other components. All associated plans
and specifications that may affect the performance of an
engineering job are subject to the engineering job approval
process.

(210-V, NEM, Amend. 22, Oct. 1995)

501-5
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS

501.05 Engineering job review.

(a) Design reviews.

(1) Classes I through V - No more than one level of

design review of jobs in engineering job classes I through V
is required to assure technical quality during design, as
determined by the State Conservation Engineer.

(2) Classes VI through VIII - One level of design review

of jobs in engineering job classes VI through VIII is
require(d) The Director of the Conservation Engineering
Division will determine the design review capability of the
engineering staffs based on the demonstrated competence in
these jobs and the sustained workload to maintain that
proficiency. When a State Conservation Engineer or other
key individual responsible for design is replaced, or when
other conditions warrant, review capability is to be
reviewed. The Director of the Conservation Engineering
Division will initiate the review, will establish the level
of review capability, and will notify the State Conservation
Engineer in writing.

(3) Design reviews will be performed as follows:

Classes I - V: As determined by the State Conservation

Class VI: In-state staff review (if review
capability established by the Director
of the Conservation Engineering Division)

Class VII: Independent staff review

Class VIII: Director of Conservation Engineering

Division review and concurrence

An independent staff review is a review conducted by a

staff that is not supervised by the State Conservation
Engineer and that did not participate in the design. The
Director of the Conservation Engineering Division will
concur in the selection of an independent reviewer if
outside the NRCS.

(4) The policy on checking and reviewing engineering

work is contained in 511.05.

(b) Post Reviews.

Post reviews are independent reviews made after

installation of the practice or structure. Spot checks, as
required by General Manual 450-407, are examples of post
reviews. They are valuable for quality assurance,

(210-V, NEM, Amend. 22, Oct. 1995)

501-6
 SUBPART A – REVIEW AND APPROVAL

determination of technical competence and experience,

determination of the need for additional training, and
determination of the need for revision of engineering
procedures and criteria. Supporting data, drawings, and
specifications for the jobs selected for post review are to
be examined. The materials will be reviewed for conformance
to national policy, standards, criteria, and sound
engineering practice. Onsite reviews may be necessary,
depending on the job's complexity, safety and health risks,
or environmental risks. After each job is reviewed, the
post reviewer is to make a written report to the State
Conservation Engineer. A copy will be sent to the Director
of the Conservation Engineering Division for class I through
V jobs only if the findings impact changes in national
policy or standards and for all class VI through VIII jobs.

(1) Classes I through V - The State Conservation

Engineer will develop the procedure for post review of
representative engineering jobs classes I through V to
assure technical quality in conformance with General Manual
450-407.

(2) Classes VI-VIII - The Director of Conservation

Engineering will determine the need for post reviews of
engineering job classes VI through VIII.

501.06 Engineering work reviewed for other agencies.

(a) Engineering work reviewed for regulatory agencies.

(1) Approval procedures must also contain provisions for

reviewing the engineering design parts of plans for
cooperating regulatory agencies and determining if the plans
comply with NRCS technical standards. The approval
authority for this type of review is to be the same as
assigned for engineering job approval authority.

(2) NRCS employees are not to review designs that are

outside NRCS's area of technical expertise. For example,
NRCS is not to review the structural strength of a building
with rooftop storage used for runoff management. For this
design, the review should be for the functional aspects of
the plan, including storage and release rates. Any apparent
deficiencies in specific designs noted during the review
should be called to the attention of the responsible agency,
even though they are outside the scope of the review.

(3) Review responses are to be expressed in terms of

compliance or non-compliance of identified items and not in
terms of approval or disapproval. Response comments are to
indicate the extent or nature of the review, such as:
"Review was conducted in accordance with practice standard
___ and the

(210-V, NEM, Amend. 22, Oct. 1995)

501-7
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS

following was determined. Review has been limited to the

functional layout and size in accordance with the
requirements of Regulation ___ .”

(4) In all cases, applicable requirements of federal,

state, and local laws, regulations, and codes are to be met.

(b) Engineering work reviewed for state and other federal

agencies.

If engineering work is reviewed for other federal or

state agencies, the work is to be checked against NRCS
criteria (practice standards) and sound engineering
practices appropriate for the size and type of job. The
report back to the agency is to indicate compliance or non-
compliance to NRCS standards and criteria. The approval of
the review report is to be at the same level as engineering
job approval for similar NRCS designs.

501.07 Classification of engineering jobs.

(a) The engineering job classifications that utilize

controlling factors are displayed by conservation
engineering practice in Exhibit 1 (501.08). If the value of
any one of the controlling factors is exceeded, the job
becomes the next higher class.

(b) Approval authority for all of the conservation

engineering practices listed as Class V may be delegated as
Classes I through V and those listed as class VI may be
delegated as Class VI by State Conservation Engineers. The
listed values of the controlling factors are maximums;
therefore, State Conservation Engineers may specify lower
values of the controlling factors than those listed.

(c) Approval authority for those conservation engineering

practices that are not listed in Exhibit 1 also may be
delegated as Classes I through V by State Conservation
Engineers unless the hazard classification is significant or
high or unless classified differently by the Director of the
Conservation Engineering Division.

(d) Those jobs covered by interim standards will be

classified by the Director of the Conservation Engineering
Division when the interim standards are approved.

(e) Exhibit 1 (501.08) is in the form that can be used for

documenting the design review capability of engineers by the
Director of the Conservation Engineering Division.

(210-V, NEM, Amend. 22, Oct. 1995)

501-8
 SUBPART A – REVIEW AND APPROVAL

(f) Exhibit 2 (501.09) is a guide for a state engineering

job approval authority chart. The practices listed are
examples only. 501.04 describes the process by which the
State Conservation Engineer is to delegate engineering job
approval authority.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 26, November 1999)

501-9
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS

501.08 Exhibit 1 – Engineering job classifications that utilize controlling factors.

Review Capability Determination

Name _________________________ Title _________________Grade________Location___________________________

Determined by ____________________________ Title Director, Conservation Engineering Division Date ___________
Concurred _________________________________Title____________________________________Date_____________
(Supervisor)
Practice Practice Name Controlling Factor Units Class Class Class Maximum
Code V VI VII Review
Capability
Any practice Hazard potential as defined class Low Signif- High
in §503 icant
Any practice Alters the visual resources of beaches None All All
and shorelines on oceans and the Great
Lakes
348 Dam, Diversion Streamflow (25-yr) cfs 2000 3000 All
Flow diverted cfs 200 500 All
Height of drop feet 8 15 All
Dams and Structures
402 Dam, Floodwater Drainage area sq. mi. 20 40 50
Retarding Effective height feet 35 50 75
349 Dam, Multiple- Embankment over active None None None
Purpose fault
410 Grade Stabilization
Structure
436 Irrigation Storage
Reservoir
350 Sediment Basin
587 Structure for
Water Control
400 Floodwater Design capacity cfs 500 All All
Diversion
404 Floodway Design capacity cfs 1000 2000 All
320 Irrigation Capacity cfs 500 1000 All
Canal or Lateral
430 Irrigation Water Pipeline capacity 50 psi gpm 3500 All All
Conveyance < 50 psi gpm 5000 All All
Land Reclamation
451 Fire Control Area acres 1 All All
456 Highwall Height with seepage feet 35 75 All
Treatment Height without seepage feet 50 100 All
453 Landslide Area acres 1 5 All
Treatment Depth feet 10 20 All
Slope percent 50 All All
452 Shaft and Adit Shaft depth feet 50 All All
Closing Shaft span feet 16 All All
Adit barrier, permeable All All All
Adit barrier, impermeable None None All

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 26, November 1999)

501-10
 SUBPART A – REVIEW AND APPROVAL

501.08 Exhibit 1 – Engineering job classifications that utilize controlling factors (continued).

Practice Practice Name Controlling Factor Units Class Class Class Maximum
Code V VI VII Review
Capability
454 Subsidence Fill height feet 20 All All
Treatment
455 Toxic Discharge Flow cfs 100 1000 All
Control
582 Open Channel Design capacity cfs 1000 2000 All
Design velocity fps 10 12 All
516 Pipeline Pressure psi 300 All All
533 Pumping Plant Axial flow pump capacity gpm 50,000 100,000 All
for Water Control Centrifugal & turbine
pump capacity gpm 3500 5000 All
Centrifical pump static head ft 350 500 All
Turbine pump statichead ft 500 1000 All
Recreation Water supply or daily
facilities sewage treatment design
Onsite capacity 200 400 All
Offsite public (people) 400 800 All
584 Stream Channel Design capacity cfs 1000 2000 All
Stabilization Design velocity fps 10 12 All
580 Streambank and Bankfull capacity cfs 5000 20,000 All
Shoreline Bankfull velocity fps 10 12 All
Protection Water height above shoreline feet 3 5 All
608 Surface Drain, Design capacity cfs 1000 2000 All
Main or Lateral Design velocity fps 10 12 All
313 Waste Storage Storage capacity cu. ft. 2000 5000 All
Facility (thous.)
359 Waste Treatment Aerobic surface area acres 25 50 All
Lagoon Anaerobic volume cu. ft. 2000 5000 All
(thous.)

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 26, November 1999)

501-11
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS

501.08 Exhibit 2 – Engineering job approval authority.

Name_________________________Title_________________Grade________Location_____________________
Delegated by__________________________Title______________________________________Date_________
(Responsible Engineer)
Concurred _____________________________Title_________________________________Date_____________
(Supervisor)
Practice Practice Name Controlling Factor Units Class Class Class Class Class Class Maximum
Code
I II III IV V VI Approval
Authority

Any practice Hazard potential as class Low Low Low Low Low Signif-
defined in §503 icant
Any practice Alter the visual resources of None None None None None All
beaches and shoreline on oceans
and the Great Lakes
560 Access Road Surface Treatment Kind Soil Gravel Asphalt Concrete All All
Length feet 2000 5000 10,000 20,000 All All
Maximum Grade percent 8 10 15 20 All All
Culvert Pipe inches 18 24 48 50 72 84
323 Agri-Chemical Tank Storage gallons 250 500 1000 2500 5000 All
Handling Facility Volume
310 Bedding Area acres 40 100 320 640 All All
317 Composting Capacity dead animals cu. ft. none 1250 2500 5000 All All
Facility Litter/Manure cu. ft. none 10,000 20,000 50,000 All All
326 Clearing & Length of Reach feet 1000 2500 5000 15,000 All All
Snagging
397 Commercial Hazard class class A A A A A B
Fishponds Effective height feet 15 20 25 30 35 50
Conduit inches 12 24 36 42 48 60
Storage X height ac. ft. 500 1000 2000 3000 All All
335 Controlled Area Controlled acres 5 10 50 160 All All
Drainage
348 Dam, Diversion Streamflow (25-yr) cfs 100 500 1000 1500 2000 3000
Flow diverted cfs 25 50 100 150 200 500
Height of drop feet 3 3 5 7 8 15
Dams and Structures
402 Dam, Floodwater Drainage area acres 20 99 320 640 12,800 25,600
Retarding Effective height feet 15 20 25 30 35 50
349 Dam, Multiple- Conduit inches 12 24 36 42 48 60
Purpose Storage X height ac. ft. 500 1000 2000 3000 All All
410 Grade Stabilization Embankment over None None None None None All
Structure active fault

436 Irrigation Storage

Reservoir
350 Sediment Basin
587 Structure for
Water Control

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 26, November 1999)

501-12
 SUBPART B – REPAIR AND REHABILITATION
501.20 General.

Many engineering practices require repair or

rehabilitation because of changing Technology and
deterioration from age. A rehabilitated structure should be
safe and functional for an extended period of time with
normal maintenance. The application of sound engineering
principles in the design of the repair or rehabilitation
will result in continued satisfactory performance.

501.21 Scope.

Repair or rehabilitation of all engineering practices,

whether originally installed with SCS assistance or not, is
to be carried out in accordance with provisions of this
subpart. These instructions do not apply to operation and
maintenance activities.

501.22 Applicable standards.

(a) When it has been determined that assistance is to be

provided for the repair or rehabilitation of a practice that
was originally installed with SCS assistance, the applicable
standards must be determined. Normally, these are the
standards that were used in preparing the original design;
however, the individual(s) with job approval authority (see
501.04) must determine whether the original standards are
still acceptable in light of new engineering knowledge and
current State and national criteria. If the original
standards are unacceptable, current standards are to be
used.

(b) If SCS assistance is provided for the repair or

rehabilitation of a practice that was originally installed
without SCS assistance, the practice or part of a system is
to conform to current engineering standards when completed
(see 501.23). This insures a durable, functional practice
that justifies the use of SCS resources.

(c) If the practice is an interdependent part of a system

or if an element of a practice is to be repaired or
rehabilitated, the entire system or practice is to be
carefully evaluated. The system must be sufficiently sound
to permit the practice being repaired or rebuilt to function
as designed.

501.23 Dams installed without SCS assistance.

(a) Because of the hazards associated with dams, a special

approach is necessary when assistance is requested for the
repair or rehabilitation of a dam that was built without SCS
assistance. Before any commitment for assistance is made,
the condition of the dam is to be analyzed and a
comprehensive engineering report prepared. This report is
to describe

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-13
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS
the current physical condition of the dam, specify the
repairs needed to meet SCS standards, and include an
estimate of the costs for repair or rehabilitation. The
report will be the basis for the decision to commit
resources.

(b) If the dam exceeds Class V (see 501.04), the report is

to be prepared by a non-SCS registered professional engineer
who is experienced in the design and construction of dams.
The report is to be reviewed by the state conservation
engineer and the head of the TSC engineering Staff. Their
technical acceptance of the report is necessary before
resources can be committed.

(c) If the dam is of a size normally approved by the state

conservation engineer or other employees within the state,
the report may be prepared by the owner or sponsor or by SCS
engineers. The report must be accepted or approved by an
engineer with appropriate job approval authority before
resources can be committed.

501.24 Special conditions.

(a) If urgent action is necessary to safeguard life and

property against flood damage, structure failure, etc., SCS
may provide technical assistance for temporary measures to
lessen the immediate threat. If SCS subsequently makes
permanent repairs, they are to be in conformance with
501.22.

(b) Repairs or rehabilitations under the Emergency

Conservation Measures Program are to be carried out as
specified by the Agricultural Stabilization and Conservation
Service. The practices not restored to original or current
criteria must be functional, but if the repaired or replaced
practices would create a safety hazard, they are to be
restored to meet standards.

(c) Repairs or rehabilitations under the Emergency

Watershed Protection Program or any other emergency
assistance program are to be carried out as specified for
that program; but if the repaired or replaced practice would
create a safety hazard, it is to be restored to meet SCS
standards.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-14
 SUBPART C – VARIANCE AND CHANGE
501.30 General

Improvement in construction methods, equipment, and

material, as well as findings of research and experience,
makes occasional revision of standards necessary and
desirable. However, because practice standards reflect
minimum requirements, plans and designs must be site
specific and provide for a structure that will safely and
economically accomplish its intended purpose for the
duration of its assumed economic life with reasonable
maintenance. Frequently, site conditions require additional
features or precautions. Less frequently, compensating
conditions justify a request for a variance from a standard.

501.31 National Handbook of Conservation Practices (NHCP).

Variances from the requirements of the conservation

practice standards in the NHCP are to be handled according
to 450-401.14 (GM).

501.32 Channel Stability Criteria.

(a) The analysis of channel stability requires sound

judgment. The best known design techniques and criteria are
available in Technical Release No. 25, and Practice Standard
582, Open Channel (NHCP). However, there are situations in
which channel and site conditions in association with the
methods of construction and maintenance indicate that
variations from minimum stability criteria are warranted.

(b) If the state conservation engineer determines that a

variation from stability criteria is warranted, the results
of the analysis and the proposed approach are to be
submitted to the head of the NTC engineering staff. The NTC
and the state will jointly study the data and proposal. The
head of the NTC engineering staff can then approve, require
adjustment before approval, or disapprove the variation.
The head of the NTC engineering staff is to report
variations approved to the Director, Engineering Division.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 19, Nov. 1991)

501-15
 SUBPART D – ENGINEERING WORK ON NATIONAL FORESTS
501.40 General.

(a) The Forest Service (FS) has the responsibility for

establishing the standards and criteria used for engineering
works installed on national forests. SCS often assists in
engineering works on these lands.

(b) Coordination of engineering criteria and procedures is

necessary so that the completed practice will meet the
requirements of both agencies and will function for its
intended life with normal operation and maintenance.

501.41 Scope.

Engineering coordination for planning, designing,

constructing, repairing, or rehabilitating water storage or
transmission structures on or affecting lands administered
by the FS is established by the Memorandum of Understanding
between FS and SCS (see 501.70).

501.42 Water storage or transmission structures built on

national forests.

(a) The FS has full authority and responsibility for

establishing the standards for water storage or transmission
structures to be built on national forests. "Title 7500 -
Water Storage and Transmission" of the Forest Service Manual
describes the responsibilities of the various levels of FS,
its administrative procedures, and its basic criteria for
design and construction. Structures on or affecting FS-
administered lands are to be designed to meet or exceed FS
criteria.

(b) FS procedures and criteria are found in the FS Manual,

Title 7500. State conservation engineers who may have work
on national forests should maintain a current copy of this
manual.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-17
 SUBPART E – ASSISTANCE ON SHORE EROSION CONTROL
501.50 General.

(a) Because shoreline erosion is complex, erosion control

measures for stabilization differ greatly from those used
for upland erosion control and can be very costly.

(b) Effective installation of erosion control measures can

be achieved by proper coordination with other Federal and
State agencies. This coordination eliminates duplication of
services and provides for sharing knowledge in a rapidly
changing Technology.

50l.5l Scope.

(a) SCS can provide assistance in controlling shoreline

erosion if all the following conditions are met:

(l) The problem is not created by wave action on the

open and unprotected shores of the ocean fronts or the Great
Lakes.

(2) The problem can be solved with vegetation, normal

upland erosion control practices, or minor structural
measures such as gabions or riprap revetment, masonry or
timber bulkheads, or rock or timber groins. All revetments,
bulkheads, or groins are to be no higher than 3 feet above
mean high tide or, in nontidal areas, no higher than 3 feet
above mean high water. As used here, bulkheads are designed
primarily to resist earth pressures; revetments are not.
Bulkheads and revetments are generally placed parallel to
the shore; groins are generally perpendicular to the shore.

(3) Failure of structural measures because of high

intensity storms will not create an immediate hazard to life
or result in serious damage to buildings, residences, roads,
or other high-value property.

(4) Installation of the recommended measures will have

no significant adverse effects on the environment or on
adjacent lands, waters, or installations.

(5) Sponsors and cooperators understand the level of

protection being provided and their responsibility for
maintenance and repair.

(6) Plans and schedules for installing structures and

establishing vegetation are acceptable to local, State, and
Federal agencies that have jurisdiction.

(b) SCS is not to provide design or construction

assistance to solve erosion problems created by wave action
on the open and unprotected shores of major ocean fronts or
the Great Lakes. Advice and counsel can

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-19
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS
be provided on complementary erosion control practices used
in conjunction with complex or expensive installations built
by others at these locations. Assistance can be provided
for normal erosion control on lands adjacent to these
shorelines but only at elevations not affected by wave
action.

50l.52 Coordination with Corps of Engineers.

(a) The Corps of Engineers has responsibility for beach

erosion control and shore protection on certain public lands
and navigable waters. They have authority to provide
technical and engineering assistance to nonfederal public
interests for shore and streambank erosion. (See 50l.72.)
This may include assistance to soil conservation districts.
The Corps of Engineers has defined "shore and streambank
erosion" to apply to shorelines of oceans, bluffs, bays,
estuaries, the Great Lakes, inland lakes and reservoirs, and
along banks of navigable rivers and their tributaries. They
also have responsibility for issuing permits for structures
and work in or affecting navigable waters.

(b) The following kinds of work are to coordinated with

the appropriate Corps of Engineers district engineer:

(1) Any work that will have offsite effects, such as

entrapment or diversion of littoral drift;

(2) Any work that affects Corps of engineers

jurisdictional waters;

(3) Any work that requires permits; or

(4) Any work that may be a duplication of effort.

501.53 Requirements for assistance.

(a) Assistance on shore erosion problems for individual

landowners or groups of landowners is to be subject to the
cooperator assistance priority controls established by the
conservation district.

(b) Technical assistance is to be coordinated with the

agencies issuing permits to insure conformance with their
criteria. Sponsors and cooperators must obtain any required
permits. Data that SCS has collected in the course of
making an investigation can be used by cooperators in
preparing their requests for permits.

(c) Special authorization will be considered for providing

assistance during emergencies or for meeting the
requirements of special legislation.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-20
 SUBPART F – SNOW SURVEYS AND WATER SUPPLY FORECASTING

501.60 General.

The National Resources Inventory And Snow Survey and Water Supply
Forecasting Manual (RISS) presents SCS policies for carrying out
snow survey and water supply forecast responsibilities.

501.61 SCS Responsibilities.

The Snow Survey and Water Supply Forecasting program is directed

by the Deputy Chief For Technology. Program guidance is
furnished by the Director of the Resources Inventory Division
(RID) and the RID staff. Technical guidance for data collection
facilities and hydrologic aspects are furnished by the Director,
Engineering Division, and the Engineering Division staff. This
responsibility and other SCS responsibilities are described in
RISS, Part 501.

(THE NEXT PAGE IS 501-25)

(210-V, NEM, Amend. 18, Mar. 1991)

501-21
 SUBPART G - EXHIBITS

501.70 SCS-FS Memorandum of Understanding.

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING
between
FOREST SERVICE
and
SOIL CONSERVATION SERVICE

1. PURPOSE

The purpose of this agreement is to provided for coordination

between the Soil Conservation Service (SCS) and the Forest
Service (FS) when the SCS is involved in the planning, design,
construction, repair, or rehabilitation of water storage or
transmission structures on or affecting lands; administered by
the FS. As an interdepartmental agency agreement, nothing in
this document is meant to change delegations of authority or
agency practice in regard to issuing permits and external
relations.

2. SCOPE

This agreement applies to work under the following acts and

subsequent amendments: PL 74-46, Soil Conservation Act; PL 78-
534, Flood Control Act of 1944; PL 83-566, Watershed Protection
and Flood Prevention Act; PL 89-90, Water Resources Planning Act
(River Basins Program); and PL 87-703, Food and Agriculture Act
of 1962 (RC&D Program).

Structures as used herein refers to facilities used for water

storage, water transmission, and related improvements such as
access roads, boat launching ramps and campgrounds.

3. RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Forest Service. The FS has responsibility for management

of National Forest Land and will:

--approve the location of all water storage or transmission

proposed thereon.

--assure projects are planned and designed to minimize

adverse impacts on resource values and the environment, including
coordination with State and local resource agencies.

--establish specific criteria covering the design of

structures.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-25
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS

--authorize land use by the project proponent through

issuance of an authorizing instrument in accordance with agency
criteria and requirements.

--review individual water storage or transmission plans to

assure environmental and forest resource values are adequately
protected (FS engineering certification of design is not required
for designs approved by the SCS State Conservation Engineer).

--assist SCS with the preparation of environmental

assessments or impact statements when needed for structure
construction involving RC&D, PL 566, and PL 534 structures.

--meet requirements of NEPA, the Endangered Species Act of

1973, cultural resource legislation and related Executive Orders
for PL 46 projects.

--incorporate in the authorizing document suitable criteria

to make the proponent responsible for property and GLO corner
preservation and remonumentation.

--make periodic inspections of structure maintenance and

safety.

B. Soil Conservation Service. The SCS has technical

responsibility for the planning, design, and construction of
certain water storage and transmission structures on or affecting
National Forest lands. In carrying out this responsibility, the
SCS will:

--obtain FS authorization prior to conducting any on-site

surveys and investigations within the National Forest. Such
authorization does not guarantee issuance of a Special Use Permit
for construction. Issuance of such a permit is contingent on a
favorable environmental assessment, compliance with PL 89-665, PL
93-291, E.O. 11593 and other cultural resource legislation, and
the Endangered Species Act.

--design water storage and transmission structures in accord

with FS criteria, whenever it is the most restrictive, and with
other requirements needed to minimize the project's impact on
forest resource values and the environment. Each design shall be
approved by the SCS State Conservation Engineer.

--verify that the proponent has obtained required Federal,

State or local water rights, permits or certifications. Verify
that the proponent has a FS Special Use Permit or easement before
proceeding with construction.

--meet requirements of NEPA, provisions of the Endangered

Species Act of 1973, cultural resource legislation and related
Executive Orders for RC&D, PL 566, and PL 534 structures.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-26
 SUBPART G - EXHIBITS

--assure that construction drawings are provided for

permanent access roads.

--assist the applicant to locate and protect during

construction all existing General Land Office corner
monumentation plus all boundary corners between FS and private
land that may be disturbed. Notify the FS and proponent of those
corners that need to be remonumented because of inundation or
unavoidable disturbance.

-provide certification by an SCS engineer that the project

has been constructed in accordance with the approved drawings and
specifications and furnish "as built" drawings to the FS.

--develop with the proponent and furnish the FS an operation

and maintenance plan for the completed project works. This plan
should be discussed with the proponent at a meeting attended by a
representative of the FS.

--provide FS a copy of all maintenance and safety inspection

reports.

C. Joint Responsibilities.
In all programs of both Services which involve mutual
interests, it is imperative that each agency inform the other at
the first inception of a potential structure construction or
rehabilitation so that on-going cooperation can be maintained.

In those programs where one agency has leadership, the other

Service will be kept informed and invited to participate in (1)
public information meetings, (2) meetings with proponents, (3)
environmental meetings, (4) investigations, and (5) planning of
the project.

The FS and SCS jointly will determine the project's hazard

classification. However, final approval of hazard classification
rests with FS.

The SCS will participate with FS in making periodic

maintenance and safety inspections of RC&D, PL 566, and PL 534
structures.

The SCS and FS mutually will agree on location and design

standards for work roads and temporary access roads.

SUPPLEMENTATION
As needed to cover local conditions, this agreement may be
supplemented at the State level, by agreement between State
Conservationists and Regional Foresters.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-27
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS

Local agreements may be desirable to cover individual situations

involving recreation development and operation and other special
needs and requirements.

DURATION

The working agreement shall become effective upon the date of the
last affixed signature and shall continue in effect until
terminated in writing: by either party upon giving 60 days'
notice to the other.

_________/S/______________ _____/S/_______________
R. M. DAVIS, Administrator JOHN R. McGUIRE, Chief
Soil Conservation Service Forest Service, USDA

4/6/77 1/24/77
Date Date

Attachment:

Exhibit A
Exhibit B

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-28
 SUBPART G - EXHIBITS

501.71. Flow chart for engineering activities between SCS and FS.
RECOMMENDED FLOW CHART EXHIBIT A
for
ENGINEERING ACTIVITIES
between
SOIL CONSERVATION SERVICE & FOREST SERVICE
PL-46

SOIL CONSERVATION SERVICE JOINT ACTION FOREST SERVICE

(1) Notify FS of any potential (1) Notify SCS of any potential new
new projects or projects projects or projects involving
involving rehabilitation rehabilitation measures that NRCS
measures. is likely to be involved in.
(2) Make joint field
inspection and discuss needs
related to the project. The
preliminary hazard (3) Issue letter of authorization
classification, hydrologic and to SCS for site investigations and
basic design criteria, and/or preliminary surveys.
rehabilitation needs are
determined
(4) Make preliminary surveys (4) Make preliminary archeological
and site investigations to and historic examination and
determine feasibility. provide SCS with preliminary
information.
(5) Prepare preliminary (6) Meet with proponent to (7) Proponent applies for and is
investigation report. present preliminary issued a special use permit
investigation report. conditioned on final approval
construction plans and favorable
(8) Determine hazard project assessment. Give SCS
classification and establish authorization to proceed with final
final design criteria for the survey and design.
structure. Agree on location
and design standards for work
roads and access roads.
(9) Prepare final plans and (9) Complete archeological and
specifications for the historic examinations and prepares
project, including plans for an environmental impact assessment
work roads and access roads. or EIS (if needed). Based on
environmental assessment of EIS,
advises SCS of special provisions
(10) Develop an O&M plan with (10) Jointly agree on an that must be included in the plans
the proponent and discuss it inspection frequency of each and specs, including protection and
at a meeting attended by the structure. preservation of cultural
FS. properties.
(12) State Conservation (11) Make on-site review of (12) Approve O&M plan and
Engineer approves plans and the completed plans and construction plans or advise SCS of
specifications and furnishes specifications. additional measures needed to
copies to FS. protect Forest resources or
environmental values.
(13) Verify that the proponent (14) Authorizes permittee to
has obtained any required proceed with construction and
State permits or notify SCS (the permittee is
certifications and advises FS. responsible for construction).
(15) Provide for engineering (16) Make a semi-final (15) Provide resource protection
inspection services. inspection. inspection services.
(17) Make final inspections (18) Authorize the operation of the
and certify that the project completed works.
was built in accordance with
the approved plans and specs.
Furnish “as-built” plans to
the FS.
(19) On request by the FS, the (19) Make periodic maintenance and
SCS will provide technical safety inspection.
advice and assistance to the
permittee on maintenance.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-29
 PART 501 - AUTHORIZATIONS

RECOMMENDED FLOW CHART EXHIBIT B

for
ENGINEERING ACTIVITIES
between
SOIL CONSERVATION SERVICE & FOREST SERVICE
PL-566, PL-534, and RC&D

SOIL CONSERVATION SERVICE JOINT ACTION FOREST SERVICE

(1) Preliminary discussion with
prospective proponents on
possible projects and
alternatives.
(2) After proponent makes a (3) Field examination based on (4) Issue letter of
request for planning assistance, existing information. authorization to SCS for site
the responsible State agency investigation and preliminary
assigns a priority. SCS notifies surveys.
the FS of the planning priority
and the legal sponsor.
(5) Make additional field (5) Determine preliminary hazard (5) Provide input to SCS on the
evaluations and prepare class for individual structures. preliminary investigation
preliminary investigation report. report.
(6) Prepare watershed or measure (6) Determine final hazard class (6) Provide input to SCS on
plan according to Principals and and establish design criteria preparation of watershed and
Standards for Water Resource for the individual structure. measure plans. Provide input
Projects. Prepares environmental Agree on location and design to SCS on preparation of
assessment and EIS (if needed) standards for work roads and environmental assessment, EIS
and make archeological and access roads and on making archeological and
historic examinations. (Note: historic examinations.
many approved and active work
plans predate NEPA. Where this is (8) Sponsor applies for and FS
the case, an environmental (7) Prepare plan for survey issues a special use permit for
assessment must be prepared for recovery protection and construction, operation and
remaining structures prior to preservation of cultural maintenance of the individual
their construction. properties. structure.
(9) Prepare plans and (9) Provide assistance on the
specifications for all project final location and on the
work including work roads and design of the work roads and
access roads. State Conservation access roads.
Engineer approves plans and (10) Make on-site review of the
specifications and furnishes final plans and specifications.
copies to FS.
(11) Verify that the proponent (11) Review and approve plans
has obtained any required State or advise SCS of additional
permits or certifications and measures needed to protect
advises FS. Forest environmental values and
report results of cultural
resource actions.
(13) Develop an O&M plan with the (13) Jointly agree on an (13) Approve O&M plan.
project and discuss it at a inspection frequency of each
meeting attended by the FS. structure. (14) Authorize construction.
(15) Provide for project (15) Provide assistance to SCS
construction and inspection on meeting resource protection
services, including special needs during construction.
features for environmental
protection and preservation of (16) Make semi-final inspection.
cultural resources.
(17) Make final inspection.
(18) Certify that the project was (19) Authorizes permittee to
constructed in accordance with commence operations.
the approved drawings and
specifications. Furnish “as-
built” plans to FS.
(20) Make joint or individual
periodic maintenance and safety
inspection.
(21) Follow up to see that the
permittee performs the needed
maintenance.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-30
 SUBPART G - EXHIBITS

501.72 Corps of Engineers Regulation 1110-2.

(To be supplied later.)

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

501-31
 PART 502 – ENGINEERING RESPONSIBILITIES

(Reserved.)

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

502-1
 PART 503 - SAFETY

SUBPART A – ENGINEERING ACTIVITIES AFFECTING UTILITIES

503.00 General.

(a) Private and public utilities may be jeopardized and

equipment operators and others may be injured during site
investigations and construction of engineering structures if
proper procedures are not followed.

(b) Established procedures for locating utilities and notifying

owners are the first step in eliminating many potential
accidents. These procedures, if followed, will reduce personal
injuries, property damage, and interruption of utility service.

503.01 Scope.

(a) This subpart is concerned only with the minimal

requirements for developing a plan to prevent damage to public or
private utilities and injury to people from contact with
utilities during engineering and construction activities.

(b) Public and private utilities include transmission lines,

cables, and pipelines.

503.02 General considerations.

(a) SCS personnel are to take adequate precautions to minimize

hazards from or damages to utilities, both overhead and
underground, during location, investigation, design, and
construction of any works carried out under SCS programs.

(b) Land owners or operators, sponsoring organizations and

contractors are to be informed that they will be liable for any
damage resulting from disruption of service caused by
construction activities. They are to be informed that SCS makes
no representation on the existence or nonexistence of any
utilities. A letter may be used for this purpose. Absence of
utilities on construction drawings is not assurance that no
utilities are present at the site.

(c) SCS may be held responsible for damage done by its

employees during site investigations.

(d) Indicate known utilities on construction drawing with

appropriate symbols and identification.

(e) Each state office is to develop a procedure for carrying

out its responsibilities within these guidelines.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 5, Aug. 1983)

503-1
 PART 503 - SAFETY

503.03 Investigations.

If subsurface investigation or construction is proposed, the

responsible SCS employee is to check with the land owner or
operator or with the sponsoring organizations to determine if
there are underground utilities in the work are. Also check
records of known utilities on file in the field office. On field
inspection, particular attention should be given to utility
markers set in fence lines or elsewhere.

503.04 Buried utilities.

(a) If buried utilities are known to be in the vicinity of

proposed work, the responsible SCS employee is to inform the land
owner or operator or the sponsoring organizations of this fact
and of the land owner or operator's responsibility to take the
following actions:

(1) Notify the utility company of time, place, and type of

work to be done.

(2) Request that the buried utility be located and staked on

the ground both horizontally and vertically by the utility owner.

(3) Request that a representative of the utility company be

present during any excavation operations.

(4) Notify the contractor of the location of the utility in

relation to the job work area.

(5) Fill out lost card Form SCS-ENG-5, sign, and return to
SCS after the required action has been completed. Failure to
return completed postcard will result in termination of SCS
assistance.

(b) The responsible SCS employee must make sure that the
preceding steps have been carried out by the land owner or
operator or the sponsoring organizations before beginning work in
the vicinity of the buried utility.

503.05 Checklist.

The responsible SCS employee is to keep a checklist, recording

action taken pertaining to work in the vicinity of buried
utilities. The checklist is to be maintained in the SCS job
file. See Form SCS-ENG-6.

503.06 State laws.

If State laws and regulations have different requirements, SCS is

to comply with the laws and regulations. Procedures may vary
from 503.04 if equivalent in effectiveness..

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 5, Aug. 1983)

503-2
 SUBPART B – PUBLIC SAFETY AT STRUCTURE SITES

503.10 General.

Many SCS-assisted structures, by nature, may be hazardous to

the public. Features designed for recreation or fish and
wildlife enhancement invite the public, and children especially
are attracted to structures that provide an opportunity to play
in water. Reservoirs and structures such as open-top spillway
risers, high- or steep-walled channels and chutes, plunge pools,
and stilling basins are especially hazardous and require special
attention to safety measures.

503.11 Scope.

All SCS-assisted designs and structures, regardless of who is

responsible for installation and maintenance of safety measures,
are to include necessary safety measures.

503.12 Recommended safety measures.

All structures are to be designed to avoid hazardous conditions

where possible and safeguards to protect the public are to be
provided where hazards are unavoidable. Following are some
specific safety measures that should be used where appropriate:

(a) Post warning signs where they are clearly visible but not
visually degrading.

(b) Paint "DANGER - STAY OFF" on risers and highwalls. Use

only if no other method is appropriate. Danger signs should be
unobtrusive, if possible.

(c) Locate riser in reservoir rather than in embankment if

climatic conditions permit.

(d) Use covered-top drop inlet.

(e) Use low-level inlets to keep normal water level below main
inlet.

(f) Do not install permanent ladders.

(g) Use trash rack that cannot be easily entered.

(h) Use catwalks only where absolutely necessary and use guard
rails or protective fences with a locked gate where they are
necessary.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

503-3
 PART 503 - SAFETY

(i) Prevent access to deep stilling basins, drop structures,

plunge pools, chutes, steep or vertical walled channels, etc.,
with protective chain-link fence and/or provide escape routes.

(j) Flatten side slopes of pools on at least one side.

(k) Install guard rails on the top of highwalls and steep cuts
that cannot be protected with fences.

503.13 Maintenance of steep slopes.

(a) Advise farmers, maintenance personnel, and others against

operating equipment on steep slopes.

(b) Recommend use of proper safety devices on equipment

(protective frames, crush-resistant cabs, and seat belts).

(c) Call attention to hazards in maintenance plans and

agreements.

(d) Specify safe procedures in maintenance plans and agreements

that clearly exclude operation of equipment on steep slopes.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

503-4
 SUBPART C – SAFETY DURING GEOLOGIC INVESTIGATIONS

503.20 General.

Geologic investigations can be hazardous to the personnel

involved because of the nature of site terrain and equipment
used. These conditions require a careful analysis of the
investigation process to anticipate and fully evaluate the
potential safety hazard which may exist.

503.21 Scope.

All SCS geologic investigation plans are to include an

assessment of anticipated safety hazards and a schedule of
planned precautionary measures known as the Safety Plan. This
plan shall include a schedule of safety meetings.

503.22 Hazard Potential.

The following potential hazards related to geologic

investigations are cited for illustration. This listing is not
intended to be all inclusive. Therefore, site specific safety
evaluations must be made.

(a) Rock falls and avalanches.

(b) Landslides.
(c) Flash floods.
(d) Overhead utilities.
(e) Underground utilities
(f) Dead trees and snags.
(g) Pit and trench walls.
(h) Lighting.
(i) Hazards associated with equipment use.
(j) Snakebite.
(k) Open test pits or bore holes.
(l) Sinkholes.
(m) Subsidence.
(n) Weak bridges.
(o) Hazardous waste.

For additional guidance see "SCS safety guide for Geologic

Investigations, December 1972," and "SCS Safety Manual for
Geologic Investigations."

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 11, Oct. 1986)

503-5
 PART 503 - SAFETY

SUBPART D – DAM SAFETY

503.50 Involvement with dams.

(a) NRCS involvement with dams and dam safety includes

activities in planning and design, and to some degree
construction and operation and maintenance (O&M). NRCS is
concerned about safety of dams and addresses the safety aspects
at the appropriate stages of involvement. For this reason,
consideration of dam safety issues is located in various places
throughout the NRCS directives system. To locate the specific
references consult the latest directives index (120-400).

(b) NRCS provides technical assistance on more dams than any

other government agency or consulting firm. NRCS does not own
these dams and most of them are nonfederal. For some, financial
assistance is available through project programs. NRCS is
involved in O&M activities through the preparation of O&M plans
for all inventory dams (180-500.22 B and 180-500.30 D). In
addition, NRCS receives inspection reports for dams installed
under project activities (180-500.32). Additional technical
assistance is provided for O&M as determined by the state
conservationist.

(c) The Federal Guidelines for Dam Safety were prepared by the
Ad Hoc Interagency Committee on Dam Safety of the Federal
Coordinating Council for Science, Engineering and Technology.
The guidelines were prepared in response to a Presidential
memorandum of April 23, 1977, and were published on June 25,
1979. the guidelines were transmitted to the Federal agencies
for implementation by the President's memorandum of October 4,
1979, which stated, "... I ask that the head of each Federal
Agency responsible for or involved with planning, site selection,
design, construction, certification or regulation, inspection,
maintenance and operation, repair, financial or technical
assistance, or ultimate disposition of dams adopt and implement
the Federal guidelines, as applicable."

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

503-7
 PART 503 - SAFETY

503.51 USDA involvement.

(a) USDA Departmental Regulation Number 1043-18 establishes a

USDA Dam Safety Committee and requires the Farmers Home
Administration (FmHA), Forest Services (FS), Rural
Electrification Administration (REA), Agricultural Research
Service (ARS), and NRCS each to designate a dam safety officer to
make up the committee. This regulation was issued in
implementing the Federal Guidelines for Dam Safety. See Exhibit
506.40.

(b) The Assistant Secretary for Natural Resources and

Environment chairs the committee. The NRCS dam safety officer is
the Executive Secretary of the committee.

(c) The Executive Secretary of the committee is the USDA

contact with the Chief of Dam Safety of the Federal Emergency
Management Agency (FEMA) on technical matters. The FS dam safety
officer also fully participates.

503.52 NRCS Dam Safety Officer.

(a) The Director, Engineering Division, is the NRCS dam safety

officer.

(b) The dam safety officer reports directly to the Chief on

issues that affect dam safety. Directives and needed actions are
implemented through normal channels.

(c) The dam safety officer has responsibility for—

(1) Ensuring that policy and procedures related to dam safety

are adequate;

(2) Making reasonable and prudent efforts to ensure that dams

installed with NRCS assistance are safe;

(3) Seeing that all levels of NRCS are aware of the need for
actions to ensure that dams installed with NRCS assistance are
safe;

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

503-8
 PART 503 - SAFETY

(4) Evaluating safety-related administrative and technical

practices concerning design, construction, operation,
maintenance, periodic inspections, and rehabilitation of dams;

(5) Maintaining an inventory of NRCS-assisted dams; and

(6) Providing leadership in representing NRCS in Federal and

other activities leading to the establishment of policy,
procedure, and criteria for dam safety.

503.53 Interagency involvement.

(a) NRCS is involved with other Federal agencies at the

national level in dam safety activities, both formally and
informally. As Executive Secretary of the USDA Dam Safety
Committee, the Director, Engineering Division, is the USDA member
on the Interagency Committee on Dam Safety (ICODS).

(b) State conservationists are encouraged to work with other

Federal agencies in dam safety activities.

503.54 Other (non-governmental) involvement.

NRCS encourages its employees to become involved at all levels

with various technical and professional groups in dam safety
activities.

503.55 NRCS/State Relationships.

NRCS supports strong State dam-safety programs. A strong State

dam-safety program is imperative because NRCS lacks operation and
maintenance (O&M) authority and does not have continuing
responsibility for the nonfederal dams installed under NRCS
programs. It is NRCS policy to complement and not compete with
State dam safety programs.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

503-9
 PART 503 - SAFETY

503.56 Responsibility for dams.

The owner of a dam is responsible for potential hazards created

by the dam. The States are responsible for safeguarding the
lives and property of their citizens. NRCS is responsible for
making sure that the assistance it provides for dams is
technically sound and meets applicable state regulations and
criteria.

506.57 NRCS assistance

(a) Each state conservationist is to assist the State to

develop a strong dam-safety program as needed. The state
conservationist is also to continue to work with others such as
the State conservation committee, National Association of
Conservation Districts (NACD), Land Improvement Contractors of
America (LICA), Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), Soil
Conservation Society of America (NRCSA), American Society of
Agricultural Engineers (ASAE), American Society of Civil
Engineers (ASCE), National Society of Professional Engineers
(NSPE), etc., to encourage strong State programs. The state
conservationist should work with the State as appropriate at the
policy level such as by providing model legislation and
regulations and by Technology transfer. NRCS involvement in
formal inspections could be limited to some percentage of the
NRCS-assisted dams. This involvement, however, permits NRCS and
the State to derive the benefits of mutual Technology exchange.
NRCS participation in at least some of the initial inspections
may also be particularly desirable to provide feedback to the
design process.

(b) Each state conservationist is to establish needed working

arrangement with the State for NRCS assistance in maintaining a
strong State dam-safety program. It is recognized that a few
years may be required for some States to implement such a
program. State conservationists are to consider progress being
made by their respective States in determining whether or not to
continue technical and financial assistance for the installation
of inventory-type dams (520.21 F) of this manual).

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

503-10
 PART 503 - SAFETY

503.58 Key factors.

Several key factors should be considered in developing and

maintaining the State program. Among them are:

(a) Consistency with the Federal guidelines for dam safety;

(b) Consistency with the model state law prepared by the United
States Committee on Large Dams (USCOLD);

(c) Recognition that some classification system is desirable--

all dams are not necessarily high-hazard dams;

(d) Assurance of proper engineering criteria through a State

approval or certification system covering both design and
construction;

(e) Requirements for adequate maintenance of dams;

(f) Procedures for adequate inspection, including appropriate

participation by qualified personnel;

(g) Provisions for periodic reviews of hazard class and

educational programs and regulations to discourage development
downstream of class A and B dams that would change the
classification;

(h) Provisions for emergency action plans for class C dams;

(i) Authority to take action to alleviate unsafe conditions,

such as by modifying the dam or removing the hazard;

(j) Adequacy of staffing and funding on a continuing basis;

(k) Inclusion of all inventory-type dams (520.21 F of this

manual) in the State-regulated program.

503.59 Interim assistance.

It is anticipated that State dam-safety programs should provide

for adequate inspection of dams already in existence as

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

503-11
 PART 503 - SAFETY

well as new ones that are built. Until a State implements its
dam-safety program, the state conservationist may wish to assist
by making inspection assistance available. NRCS assistance may
also be desirable for the initial formal inspections of new class
(b) and (c) dams. However, as a general rule, the state
conservationist should encourage the State to eventually take on
full responsibility and phase out the NRCS assistance.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

503-12
 PART 503 - SAFETY
503.60 Exhibit. USDA Dam Safety Committee.
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
WASHINGTON, D.(c) 20250
DEPARTMENTAL REGULATION NUMBER: 1043-018
SUBJECT: USDA Dam Safety Committee DATE: July 20, 1983
OPI: Soil Conservation Service

1 PURPOSE
This regulation establishes a USDA Dam Safety Committee. Establishment is in
the public's interest in that it will strengthen darn safety efforts in the
Department and support the Executive Branch in the implementation of the
"Federal Guidelines for Dam Safety."
2 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Secretary's Memorandum No. 2007, February 25, 1980, is canceled and is
replaced by this regulation.
3 FUNCTIONS
This committee will coordinate and provide leadership to dam safety activities
in the Department. It will assist in defining needs and in implementing
procedures to enhance the safety of the dams under the agencies' jurisdiction.
The committee will be concerned with the agencies' administrative and
technical practices related to dam safety including design, construction,
operation, maintenance, periodic inspections, and rehabilitation of dams.
The committee will be advisory to the Secretary and to the agency heads.
4 MEMBERSHIP
The committee is to consist of the dam safety officers appointed by the agency
heads of Farmers Home Administration (FmHA), Forest Service (FS), Rural
Electrification Administration (REA), Agricultural Research Service (ARS), and
the Soil Conservation Service (SCS).
The Assistant Secretary for Natural Resources and Environment is to be the
Chairman. The Dam Safety Officer for SCS is to be Executive Secretary.
5 DAM SAFETY OFFICERS
Each of the member agencies is to name a dam safety officer. The
responsibility of this position is to see that the agency, as a matter of
policy and in actual practice, makes every reasonable and prudent effort to
enhance the safety of the dams under the agency's jurisdiction. Duties should
include surveillance and evaluation of the agency's administrative and
technical practices related to dam safety concerning the design and
construction of new damns and the operation, maintenance, periodic
inspections, or rehabilitation of existing dams. Also, the officer is to make
recommendations for strengthening safety practices and procedures and is to
maintain an inventory of agency dams.
The dam safety officer is to report directly to the agency head on matters of
dam safety. The officer is to function as an advisor to the head of the agency
and through the head of the agency to the administrative and technical units.

6 FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT ADMINISTRATION (FEMA)

The Chairman is to he the primary contact with FEMA for dam safety. The
Executive Secretary is to participate in FEMA's activities and to represent
the Department in the Chairman's absence.
The Executive Secretary is to be the contact for FEMA's Chief of Dam Safety in
technical matters. Also, FS's dam safety officer is to fully participate in
technical activities with FEMA's Chief of Dam Safety.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

503-13
 PART 504 – SPECIAL; INVESTIGATIONS, STUDIES, AND REPORTS

SUBPART A – PROBLEMS AND DEFICIENCIES

504.00 General.

(a) Engineering activities must be carried out with a high

level of technical competence if the results are to be of proper
quality. The appropriate level of quality can be maintained only
by engineers who use high quality specifications, criteria,
standards, and procedures. These tools must be constantly
updated because of changes in Technology and experience.
Problems, deficiencies, and failures often reflect a breakdown in
the quality control of engineering activities.

(b) Special investigations, studies, and reports of engineering

problems and deficiencies are needed to define clearly the
conditions that led to the problem or deficiency; describe in
detail the situation that exists at the time of the study,
including induced damages; define additional surveys or
investigations needed; determine the cause of the problem;
provide recommendations for resolving the problem or deficiency;
provide recommendations or changes needed to avoid a recurrence;
and fully document findings in an engineering report. These
reports provide the information needed to improve future
engineering work and resolve possible claims or litigations.

504.01 Scope.

(a) An investigation is to be made and report prepared whenever

an engineering practice, system, structure, structural element,
or material does not function as anticipated. Deficiencies or
failures that become evident during construction are also to be
investigated and reported.

(b) An investigation is to be initiated when signs of

instability or serious distress are detected. Deterioration of
concrete, severe erosion in channels, movement or cracking of the
embankment, malfunction of pipelines, and excessive seepage are
some examples of serious distress.

504.02 Reporting problems, deficiencies, and failures.

(a) The district, area, and state conservationists are to be

notified immediately of a problem or deficiency that might create
a serious emergency or a failure that has led or may lead to loss
of life, serious offsite damages, disruption of public utilities,
or major economic losses for owners, sponsors, contractors, and
SCS. The state conservationist is to telephone the Chief
promptly. The telephoned report is to include such critical
information as identification of the structure, project, and
location and a description of the situation at the time of the
call. When a major dam, Class V or larger (501.04 of

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

504-1
 PART 504 – SPECIAL; INVESTIGATIONS, STUDIES, AND REPORTS

this manual), is affected, the state conservationist is to see

that the state conservation engineer provides the report required
in paragraph (d) of this section.

(b) Normal lines of communication are to be used when reporting

problems, deficiencies, or failures other than those described in
paragraph (a) of this section. Political and social effects are
to be considered in determining the urgency of the notification
to line officers and the need for informing others. Jobs in
Classes I through IV (501.04 of this manual) do not usually merit
special reporting because they rarely have the potential to
create significant damages.

(c) If there is a significant danger to life or property, the

state conservationist is to insure that appropriate authorities
and owners or sponsors are notified.

(d) If there is failure or potential failure of a Class V or

larger dam or other structure that may cause major economic
losses, the state conservation engineer is to telephone the
Director of Engineering and report the situation. The Director
is to provide engineering guidance on emergency or remedial
measures and, if appropriate, arrange for special engineering
assistance. The state conservation engineer is to keep the head
of the NTC engineering Staff informed.

504.03 Committee assignments.

(a) An investigating committee is to be named as soon as

possible after a problem, deficiency, or failure has been
identified. An investigating engineer may be named in lieu of a
committee if the cause of the problem is obvious and the practice
or structure is minor. Jobs in Classes I through IV usually are
considered minor. A committee may be named for these minor
structures if the problem is unusually complex.

(b) Committee members or investigating engineers should not

have had any significant prior participation in the design,
construction, or approval of the practice or structure. State
conservation engineers are not to be members of committees in
their states. Non-SCS personnel are to be named to the committee
only if specifically approved by the Director of Engineering.
Sponsors, State agencies, etc, may have observers with the
committee.

(c) The committee is to include appropriate specialists such as

design, hydraulic, soil, or construction engineers, geologists,
or others.

(d) For a minor practice or structure (Class I through IV) the

state conservationist or the area conservationist, if so
instructed, is to appoint the investigating committee or the
investigating engineer. The state conservation engineer is to
provide recommendations on membership for the committee.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

504-2
 SUBPART A – PROBLEMS AND DEFICIENCIES

(e) For Class V or VI jobs, the state conservationist is to

appoint the committee, based upon the recommendations of the head
of the NTC engineering Staff and the state conservation engineer.
Depending on the nature of the issue, it may be necessary to
arrange for engineers or other specialists from the NTC or from
outside the state to serve on the committee.

(f) For Class VII or VIII jobs, the state conservationist and
the head of the NTC engineering Staff are to determine the
committee membership. The head of the NTC engineering Staff is
to consult with the state conservation engineer and the Director
of Engineering about the disciplines to be included and the
membership of the committee. The state conservationist is to
arrange for the participation of the members and issue the letter
of appointment.

(g) If the problem is unusual, national in scope, or especially

significant, the Chief may appoint a separate board to study the
problem. The Director of Engineering is to make the
recommendation for the board and its membership. The state
conservationist and the NTC director are to be notified when a
board is to be established. If an investigating committee has
been established, its members are to submit their findings to the
board and, as appropriate, serve as Staff for the board.

(h) The state conservation engineer is to provide general

guidance and technical support and is to arrange for any
assistance required by the committee or board.

(i) The appointment letter is to provide general guidance on

the scope of the investigation and tentative schedule. If there
are problems or questions about the assignment, the chairman or
the investigating engineer is to resolve these issues as soon as
possible.

504.04 Procedures.

(a) General guidance in conducting and reporting the

investigation of a problem or deficiency is contained in
Technical Release No. 24, Investigating Structure Failures.

(b) Because evidence may be obscured by subsequent flow of

water, by continued deterioration of the structure, or by
emergency repairs, the investigation must begin as soon as
possible. Photographs should be made of the site at the earliest
possible time by the district conservationist or anyone visiting
the site.

(c) The investigating committee is to:

(1) Inspect the structure.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 11, Oct. 1986)

504-3
 PART 504 – SPECIAL; INVESTIGATIONS, STUDIES, AND REPORTS

(2) Obtain photographs of the structure and affected areas.

(3) Determine the high-water level that prevailed.

(4) Interview eyewitnesses and record their statements. Give

particular attention to the sequence and timing of events.

(5) Determine the time the deficiency was discovered and the
time of the last inspection of the structure.

(6) Assemble and review construction records such as diaries,

reports, test data, as-built plans and as-built reports on
construction geology.

(7) Review the design file.

(8) Gather any other information regarding the event such as

precipitation and stream flow records.

(9) Define field surveys required to record topography and

physical changes.

(10) Specify any geologic investigations and soil Mechanics

testing needed.

(11) Review all communications and staffing assignments

during design and installation of structure.

(d) After compiling the necessary data, the committee or

investigating engineer is to:

(1) Determine the cause(s) of the problem, deficiency, or

failure. Support for each cause is to be presented carefully so
as to define completely the conditions that led to the problem.

(2) Define and support conclusions.

(3) List, as appropriate, suggestions on how procedures,

criteria, designs, staffing, et(c), need to be changed to avoid a
recurrence.

(4) When directed by the appointing official, make

suggestions for alternative treatments in descriptive concepts
and not treatment designs details. This is a secondary purpose
of the report.

504.05 Engineering report

(a) An engineering report is to be prepared for each

investigation. The detail and composition of the report is to be
consistent with the size, complexity, and significance of the
problem, deficiency, or failure.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 11, Oct. 1986)

504-4
 SUBPART A – PROBLEMS AND DEFICIENCIES

(b) The engineering report is to include:

(1) A brief description of the committee activities.

(2) A description of the structure with pertinent data on

name, location, size, age, etc.

(3) Appropriate geologic and engineering information.

(4) A detailed description and explanation of the situation.

Include photographs to enhance the explanation.

(5) Enough narrative and data to fully document facts and

support findings and conclusions. The report is to discuss where
standards, criteria, procedures, or practices failed or were
improperly followed. The questions "What went wrong to permit
the incident to occur and what would have prevented it?" must be
answered to the best of the committee's ability.

(6) Pertinent drawings, specifications, reports, etc.

(c) An abstract is to be prepared for all engineering reports

of measures that are Class V-VII. The abstract is used to inform
other engineers so they can gain from the experience. The
abstract should not be more than two pages and is to include:

(1) Data on location, size, etc.

(2) Description of the problem, deficiency, or failure.

(3) Statement of the cause and effect.

(4) Discussion of the findings and conclusions. This

includes any identified procedure or practice which, if followed,
would have prevented or alleviated the situation.

(5) Sketches as appropriate.

504.06 Report review and acceptance.

(a) The committee or the investigating engineer is to submit

the report to the state conservationist through the state
conservation engineer. The state conservation engineer will
coordinate the reviews required and upon technical acceptance,
forward the report with his recommendations to the state
conservationist for distribution.

(b) The state conservation engineer is to solicit review

comments by employees who were responsible for preparing the
design and inspecting the construction. The state conservation
engineer's and the employees' comments are to be attached to all
copies of the report. Before the reports are released, they are
to be reviewed and accepted as follows:

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

504-5
 PART 504 – SPECIAL; INVESTIGATIONS, STUDIES, AND REPORTS

(1) Classes I through IV. The state conservation engineer

will determine when the report is technically acceptable. The
state conservation engineer will work with the committee to
resolve all issues raised. If the report identifies problems
resulting from inadequate national specifications, practice
standards, or procedures or otherwise merits special attention,
the state conservation engineer will request review comments from
the head of the NTC engineering Staff. After issues are resolved
and the state conservation engineer has determined that the
report is acceptable, the state conservation engineer is to
submit the report to the state conservationist and indicate its
technical acceptance.

(2) Classes V through VIII. The head of the NTC engineering

Staff will determine and advise the state conservation engineer
and Director of Engineering when the report is technically
acceptable. The report is to be submitted to the head of the TSC
engineering Staff for review. The head of the NTC engineering
Staff will review the report and indicate to the state
conservation engineer that the report is accepted or request
additional details, study, or other action needed for acceptance.
After all issues are resolved and the report is accepted, the
state conservation engineer is to submit the report to the state
conservationist and indicate its technical acceptance.

504.07 Release and distribution of reports

(a) After technical acceptance and receipt by the state

conservationist, the report can be released to others and may be
used as supporting documentation for requesting funds to correct
problems or deficiencies. Owners, sponsors, State agencies, and
others may be given copies after the report is accepted.

(b) As a minimum, copies of the accepted report are to have the

following distribution:

(1) Classes I through IV. One copy of the report is to be

sent to the head of the NTC engineering Staff. If the report
addresses problems resulting from inadequate national
specifications, practice standards, or procedures or otherwise
merits special attention, the head of the NTC engineering Staff
is to forward a copy of the report to the Director of
Engineering.

(2) Classes V through VIII. One copy of the report is to be

sent to the Director of Engineering and one copy is to be sent to
the head of the NTC engineering Staff.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

504-6
 SUBPART B – EMERGENCY SPILLWAY PERFORMANCE

504.10 General.

(a) Thousands of emergency spillways have been installed since

1954 when SCS began using the present procedure for design.
Several hundred more are installed each year. Major spillway
flows can be expected at several structures each year.

(b) Current emergency spillway criteria are determined by

research results reported in Technical Publication 61 (Handbook
of Channel Design for Soil and Water Conservation) procedural
analyses described in Technical Release No. 52, and the judgment
from experience gained over the years. However, most research
and field evaluations to date have been on structures with
drainage areas less than 10 square miles.

(c) Further research is needed, but laboratory model studies

are not always directly applicable and large field models or
prototype studies have not yet been undertaken. An alternative
is to make field studies of the operation of existing structures.

(d) The purpose of emergency spillway performance studies is to

carry out a continuing program to provide information that will
be helpful in confirming or improving existing design criteria;
give an indication of the upper limits of applicability of
various types of spillways; and show the extent and cost of
spillway maintenance required after flood flows.

504.11 Scope.

A study is to be made of any earth, rock (except massive,

unweathered rock), or vegetated spillway built since 1954 when
any of the following situations occur:

(a) The water surface in the reservoir has reached an elevation

above the crest of the spillway of 3 feet or more;

(b) The spillway has suffered severe damage, has approached

breaching, or has breached to any degree; or

(c) The spillway has sustained continuous discharge for 7 days

or more.

504.12 Reporting major flows.

If conditions require a study (see 504.11), the Director of

Engineering is to be notified. This notification may be in
writing and is to include the site names and numbers, watershed
names, and preliminary data on the flows. Send a copy to the
head of the NTC engineering staff.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 11, Oct. 1986)

504-7
 PART 504 – SPECIAL; INVESTIGATIONS, STUDIES, AND REPORTS

504.13 Assignments.

The study of an emergency spillway flow as described in this

subpart is to be made by qualified engineers. The state
conservation engineer is to recommend the members of the
evaluation team to the state conservationist. Hydrologists,
hydraulic engineers, and geologists are needed in various parts
of the evaluation.

504.14 Procedures.

(a) A performance study is to be made as soon after the

occurrence as practical. The study and the report are to
consider and document the information listed below and any other
pertinent information.

(1) Name of watershed.

(2) Name or number of structure and inventory number.

(3) Location (State and latitude and longitude to nearest

degree and minute).

(4) Date built.

(5) Drainage area in square miles.

(6) Height of dam.

(7) Plan and profile along spillway centerline from entrance

to streambed.

(8) Cross sections at control section and at selected points

in the exit channel showing the depth and width of the
constructed spillway.

(9) Geologic map and profiles of the control section and the
exit channel.

(10) Statement regarding the condition of the spillway before

the flood event including the density and type of vegetation.

(11) A copy of the last maintenance and inspection report

before the storm.

(12) Photographs, if available, of prestorm spillway

conditions.

(13) Date of flood.

(14) Rainfall--depths for various durations according to

either official rain gages or a "bucket survey," and the related
frequency for each duration.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 11, Oct. 1986)

504-8
 SUBPART B – EMERGENCY SPILLWAY PERFORMANCE

(15) Runoff--if a stream gage is available, USGS

"provisional" data should be included.

(16) Observed or reconstructed inflow and outflow hydrographs

at the structure, including maximum reservoir stage and duration
of emergency spillway flow.

(17) Physical factors of drainage area related to a weighted

"curve number," including antecedent moisture and vegetative
cover conditions immediately preceding the storm.

(18) Description of condition on damage in the emergency

spillway, including location, depth, and severity of erosion.

(19) Photographs of post-storm conditions in spillway and

downstream.

(20) Estimate of volume of soil and rock eroded from various

sections of the spillway.

(21) An estimate of the cost to repair the spillway.

504.15 Report.

(a) A separate spillway flow report is required for every flood

event meeting conditions in 504.11. If a storm event affects
many structure over a wide area, a reconnaissance may be made to
determine the need for making a field study on every structure.
If this situation occurs, the state conservation engineer, after
consultation with the head of the NTC engineering Staff, is to
advise the Director of Engineering and reach agreement on the
studies needed. An emergency spillway performance study does not
in any way alter circumstances under which a problem or
deficiency study may be required.

(b) A report is to be prepared for each site except as provided

in the preceding paragraph. Two copies of each report are to be
submitted to the Director of Engineering. A copy is to be
submitted to the NTC director. After the report has been
approved and accepted, a copy is to be submitted to the State
agency responsible for dam safety and to the owner or sponsor of
the structure.

504.16 Review and approval.

(a) The state conservation engineer is to approve the report

before it is sent to Engineering or the NTC.

(b) The head of the NTC engineering Staff is to provide

comments and suggestions to the Director of Engineering.

(c) The Director of Engineering is to notify the state

conservationist of acceptance of the report or of additional data
required.

(210-V-NEM, Issue 3, Feb. 1989)

504-9
 SUBPART C – RESERVOIR SEDIMENTATION SURVEYS

504.20 General

(a) Sediment has a major impact on water quality, water and

land use, environmental value, and structure performance.
Sedimentation surveys will provide states with more reliable and
defensible procedures for quantifying the off-farm impacts of
sediment, assessing the effects of conservation practices on
these off-farm impacts, and predicting sedimentation rates in
ponds and reservoirs. Measurements of the sediment accumulating
in reservoirs and determining the physical conditions influencing
the sediment yield from the contributing watersheds provide some
of the best data that can be obtained on erosion and deposition.

(b) In the early 1970's each state prepared a region-wide plan

for sedimentation surveys of selected reservoirs. The plans
identified the physiographic areas to be studied, the reservoirs
to be surveyed, and the information desired.

(c) This procedure was established to provide a systematic,

continuing accumulation of data from which sediment yield
predictions could be accurately developed. Long-term records are
necessary to establish valid average annual values. This is true
because of the erratic nature of erosion and sediment deposition
resulting from variations in vegetative cover and rainfall from
season to season and from year to year.

(d) Selection of sites and interpretation and analysis of data

are to be made by the state for local application. The NTC is to
assist states in selecting sites and concur with the selection.
The NTC is to develop regional correlations from the data.

504.21 Survey plans

(a) A survey plan for each state is to identify the areas of

study, the reservoirs to be surveyed, a proposed schedule of
surveys, and the type of information to be gathered. Plans
should identify the purpose(s) for which each pond or reservoir
is surveyed (e.g., improve farm pond design, sediment storage
requirement at planned reservoirs, use of geomorphic variables in
sediment yield prediction procedures, identify sedimentation
and/or water quality problems, monitor effects of conservation
treatment, or identify sediment sources). Ponds and reservoirs
should be selected for survey on the basis of suitability to the
purpose(s) identified. Installation assistance from SCS is not a
requirement.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 18, Mar. 1991)

504-11
 PART 504 – SPECIAL; INVESTIGATIONS, STUDIES, AND REPORTS

(b) State conservationists and NTC directors are to insure that

the survey plans are current and that the surveys are scheduled
as a part of ongoing activities. In order for the sediment
surveys to provide meaningful information, and since land use and
management change with time, a record of land use and treatment
must be continuous and current. Plans should be reviewed
periodically to determine if continued surveys would provide data
useful to both state and national interests. If it becomes
necessary to drop a site or to make a substitution, a request is
to be made to the NTC Head of Engineering Staff. The request
will describe the contributions requiring the change.

(c) These surveys are to be financed from the appropriations

that will specifically benefit from the studies.

504.22 Procedures.

The detailed procedures for making these surveys are described in

NEH-3, Chapter 7 and in ASTM/D4581.

504.23 Reports.

(a) Reservoir sedimentation reports are to be prepared by the

state for each survey as described in "Outline of Report," NEH-3,
Chapter 7. The reservoir sediment accumulation data collected
are to be sufficient to complete form SCS-ENG-34 and provide the
data on related watershed conditions (e.g., soils, surface
geology, topography and land forms, land use and treatment, and
all types of significant erosion).

(b) States should prepare non-technical summaries of the

reports for in-house use and news releases for the general
public.

(c) Each report, including completed form SCS-ENG-34, is to be

submitted to the NTC for correlation with other reports to
develop regional relationships. The NTC's are to assure
technical adequacy of the completed forms.

(d) NTC's are to submit copies of completed forms SCS-ENG-34 to

the Engineering Division as requested by the Director of the
Engineering Division at 5-year intervals.

(e) The Engineering Division provides data from the completed

form SCS-ENG-34 to the Subcommittee on Sedimentation, Interagency
Advisory Committee on Water Data, which publishes a summary of
"Sediment Deposition in U.S. Reservoirs" at 5-year intervals.

(210-V,NEM, Amend. 18, Mar. 1991)

504-12
 SUBPART D – FIELD TRIALS AND EVALUATIONS

504.30 General.

(a) New products, procedures, and techniques are essential in

maintaining strong, current engineering activities. These new
items become available from time to time. There are requests
from industry and others to put these items into immediate use.
Many of these items have great potential for use in engineering.
Others, while appearing to have merit, may in fact be inferior
and unacceptable. Before SCS adopts a product or procedure, it
must be determined that it will function as designed and last for
the design life. This may require detailed study and testing.

(b) Field trials and evaluations, in conjunction with test

data, can provide the necessary support for approving a material
or procedure for SCS use. Before a new product or procedure is
included in standards or specifications, it must be documented
that it will meet design need. Field trials and evaluations are
frequently the only methods for developing acceptable data.

(c) Trials and evaluations are to conform to policy stated in

450-GM-403.

504.31 Scope.

Field trials and evaluations are to be considered if there is a

need for determining if a product, procedure, or technique can be
used to alter, replace, or supplement existing standards
criteria, or procedures.

504.32 Approval procedures.

(a) Proposed field trials or evaluations that may change

procedures, policy, standards, or criteria are to be submitted to
the Director of Engineering. The head of the NTC engineering
Staff is to provide comments and recommendations. Proposals are
to be specific on the scope of the trial and on the materials or
procedures to be tested.

(b) The Director of Engineering is to make a recommendation on

each proposal. This may include guidance on the scope and
intensity of the study to insure national application of results.
This technical recommendation for a study does not constitute
approval for expenditure of resources. If necessary, a request
for funds and personnel should be made to the Chief.

(210-V-NEM, Sec. Ed., Issue 3, Feb. 1989)

504-13
 PART 504 – SPECIAL; INVESTIGATIONS, STUDIES, AND REPORTS

(c) Proposed field trials or evaluations that do not require a

variance from standards, criteria, specifications, policies, or
procedures may be approved by the state conservationist.

504.33 Study plan.

(a) Generally, the brief statement describing the trial or test

that accompanies the request for approval is not sufficiently
detailed to define the scope, intensity, purpose, and plan for
the study.

(b) The study plan needs to describe fully the need, the
benefits, the approach to be taken, the anticipated schedule, and
the resources required. These must be ion sufficient detail to
permit a valid assessment of the potential for obtaining the
needed data and of the potential demands for resources--
personnel, equipment, and costs.

504.34 Reports.

(a) An index and a schedule for all field trials and

evaluations are to be maintained in each state.

(b) At the time the study is approved, a schedule is to be

established for progress reports. These reports are to be
appropriate to the trials and evaluations.

(c) When the trial or evaluation is completed, a final report

is to be prepared.

(d) Copies of all reports are to be submitted to the head of

the NTC engineering Staff and the Director of Engineering. If
additional copies are required, they are to be requested in the
letter of approval for the study.

(210-V-NEM, Sec. Ed., Issue 3, Feb. 1989)

504-14
 SUBPART E – TECHNICAL MANUSCRIPT PEER REVIEW
504.40 General.

Engineering Technology is disseminated to employees through

references developed and distributed on a national, regional and
state levels. The national distributed materials are itemized in
Part 545. These reference materials have had technical review,
usually at several SCS organizational levels, prior to their
issue. These materials are available to the general public for
use and represent the agency's technical papers written by SCS
employees and distributed and published for reference by others,
represent the agency's best technical capability. When employees
prepare papers there is a need to assist them project SCS in the
best possible image. There is also a need to assure that the
content of papers distributed have high technical credibility.
To meet these objectives, a peer review of technical manuscripts
is suggested.

504.41 Scope.

Manuscripts containing information on existing or proposed

policy, criteria and procedures for engineering (this includes
geology and landscape architecture) should receive a peer review
for technical adequacy. The state conservation engineers, NTC
heads of engineering staffs, and the Director, Engineering
Division are responsible for the use of a peer review process by
their respective Staff to assure high quality technical
manuscripts for presentations and publications.

504.42 Policy.

(a) Manuscripts prepared for distribution at a meeting, but not

published in a bound book, proceeding, etc, should be peer
reviewed as follows:
(i) Manuscripts prepared by employees in the state, should be
peer reviewed by someone designated by the state conservation
engineer. At his/her option, the state conservation engineer may
request the peer review by a technical specialist in the
respective NTC.
(ii) Manuscripts prepared by a state conservation engineer or
an NTC technical specialist should be peer reviewed by a
technical specialist at the NTC as designated by the head of NTC
engineering staff.
(iii) Manuscripts prepared by NHQ Staff specialists should be
peer reviewed by a technical specialist designated by the
Director of Engineering.
(b) Manuscripts prepared by an employee for publication in a
bound book, proceedings, trade magazine, etc, should be peer
reviewed as follows:

(i) A manuscript prepared by an employee in the state should

be peer reviewed. The state conservation engineer should
consider obtaining this peer review at the NTC.

(210-V-NEM, Issue 3, Feb. 1989)

504-15
 PART 504 – SPECIAL; INVESTIGATIONS, STUDIES, AND REPORTS

(ii) A manuscript prepared by an NTC technical specialist

should be peer reviewed by a counterpart technical specialist at
the NHQ.

(iii) A manuscript prepared by an NHQ specialist should be

peer reviewed by another Staff specialist designated by the
Director of Engineering.

(c) Employees are encouraged to have manuscripts reviewed for

grammar and readability. Arrangements for this type of review
should be made with an employee at their respective office
location, i.e., state office, NTC office or NHQ.

(d) To facilitate Technology transfer, a copy of each

manuscript should be forwarded to the Director of Engineering.
The Director of Engineering will in turn distribute those
manuscripts that provide information on applied Technology to all
appropriate offices.

(210-V-NEM, Sec. Ed., Issue 3, Feb. 1989)

504-16
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

SUBPART A - INTRODUCTION

505.00 General.

(a) Non-NRCS engineering and other technical services may be

used to meet NRCS workload demands, and technical and program
needs. It is essential that NRCS not engage in engineering
services and activities that are in direct conflict or
competition with services available in the private sector. NRCS
must maintain a quality, well trained engineering staff to
support the administration of NRCS programs and work with
non-NRCS employees called on to assist in our work. In using
non-NRCS services, NRCS will strive to ensure:

1) professionalism and respect for others,

2) quality work,
3) excellence in customer service,
4) teamwork with others,
5) clearly defined responsibilities,
6) partnerships with State boards of registration,
7) engineering and ecological integrity, and
8) effective empowerment.

(b) For the purpose of this policy, non-NRCS engineering

services means services provided by any engineer, landscape
architect, geologist, or others employed by a consulting firm,
sponsoring local organization, other unit of government, private
individual land users, manufacturers of structural elements or
components, and construction contractors.

(c) For the purpose of this policy, technical services means

engineering related and construction support activities provided
by private individuals such as individual landowners and users,
conservation contractors, and others. Individuals providing
these services are not under the supervision of an NRCS employee
and may not be licensed to practice engineering. NRCS may use
the documentation furnished by private individuals performing
technical services for reporting and certifying conservation

505-1
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

practices. Non-NRCS engineers shall certify to NRCS that all

work meets current NRCS standards. This certification may be the
basis for NRCS acceptance.

(d) This policy does not apply to non-NRCS services for

software development or maintenance.

505.01 State criteria.

Opportunities to use non-NRCS engineering services vary

greatly from State to State. State conservationists are to
periodically review the scope, type, and volume of engineering
work in their states; consider the availability of non-NRCS
engineering sources; and establish criteria in accordance with
this policy for the kinds of jobs for which these sources are to
be used. Each State is to maintain liaison with consulting
engineering organizations in that State to ensure an
understanding of the division of work.

505.02 Exchange of technical services between government

agencies.

NRCS participates in the exchange of engineering services

between government agencies to expedite and improve technical
work of the agencies by sharing expertise and enhancing on-the-
job training. An agreement for exchange of services may be
formal or informal depending on the nature of the work.
Generally, simple routine exchanges are arranged by
correspondence between the agencies. More complex jobs require
formal agreements. See 505.40, USDA Memorandum of Understanding
Between the Natural Resources Conservation Service and the Forest
Service.

505.03 Review of work performed by consultants and suppliers.

(a) Standard designs and drawings prepared by others. NRCS

is often requested to approve standard drawings for measures such

505-2
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

as manure tanks or pre-fabricated structures. State conservation

engineers are to use all appropriate means to handle this request
efficiently.

(1) The state conservation engineer may perform the

review and, if appropriate, provide approval using available NRCS
resources.

(2) The state conservation engineer may request the

firm to supply a peer review conducted by an independent
engineering firm.

(3) The state conservation engineer will require the

firm to supply NRCS with a certification that the measure meets
all NRCS standards for the States where the measure is to be
applied.

(4) Designs to be reviewed by NRCS shall be

accompanied by all necessary substantiating data and
calculations.

(5) The state conservation engineer will notify the

Director of Conservation Engineering Division of all approved
standard designs and drawings prepared by others.

(b) Site specific plans and specifications. Designs,

drawings and specifications completed for NRCS, sponsors, or
landowners by consultants and others can expedite implementation
of NRCS administered programs.

(1) NRCS will provide the non-NRCS individual with the

applicable NRCS standards and provide appropriat3~e pre-design
support at the request of the landowner or sponsor.

(2) The individual will certify on the drawings that

"to the best of my professional knowledge, judgment and belief,
these plans meet applicable NRCS standards".

(3) An NRCS employee with the necessary job approval

authority shall perform a functional review to ensure, as a
minimum, that the work:

505-3
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

(i) achieves the objectives of the plan, programs,

(ii) meets the criteria in the applicable practice

standards,

(iii) complies with the applicable State and Federal

programs,

(iv) includes an Inspection Plan and Operation and

Maintenance Plan, and

(v) does not require a technical review as defined in

National Engineering Manual Section 511.05.

(c) Site specific installations. Landowners and sponsors

are encouraged to use the designers to provide construction
inspection.

(1) The landowner or sponsor will submit final as-built

drawings with a certification by the responsible individual that
"to the best of my professional knowledge, judgment, and belief
this practice is installed in accordance with the plans and
specifications and meets NRCS standards."

(2) NRCS may make a field visit to review the

application.

(3) NRCS will make any necessary program certification

for cost sharing.

505-4
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

SUBPART B - USE OF NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

505.l0 Non-project activities.

(a) Non-NRCS Engineering Services.

(1) Non-NRCS engineering services may be used to provide

assistance to individual and groups on planning, design, and
inspection services for conservation practices. Small individual
and group jobs unattractive to non-NRCS sources have a priority
for NRCS assistance. For the larger individual and group jobs,
NRCS strongly encourages using non-NRCS engineering services to
make field surveys, soil and geologic investigations, and other
special investigations, to prepare plans and specifications, and
to provide construction inspection services.

(2) State conservationists are to utilize non-NRCS

sources to meet program needs and to satisfy appropriate interest
expressed by non-NRCS sources. Generally, non-NRCS engineering
services are used for larger jobs to free NRCS for other work for
which non-NRCS engineering services cannot be obtained.

(i) The state engineering job approval classification

can be used to delineate the upper limits, in size and
complexity, of jobs NRCS regularly handles in the State or area.
For example, the state conservationist may decide that in a given
area NRCS will not handle jobs outside the approval authority of
the responsible engineer and that non-NRCS engineering services
should be used for such jobs.

(ii) If non-NRCS engineering services are used in NRCS

programs, NRCS generally makes preliminary investigations and
studies needed to support the development of the conservation
plan and, as necessary, provides needs and feasibility
determinations. NRCS also provides criteria and consultation and
maintains contact with the work to ensure that it meets the
conservation objectives of the program and that it is acceptable
by NRCS standards.

(3) When a landowner elects to use non-NRCS engineering

services to design or inspect the installation of a conservation

505-5
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

practice, the responsible NRCS employee must ensure that the

landowner and consultant understand the responsibilities of all
parties involved, especially if the practice involve~ cost-
sharing. It is recommended that a letter like the sample shown
in Subpart E - Exhibit 505.43, be used to ensure effective
communications with all involved parties.

(b) Technical Services.

(1) Conservation contractors often provide technical

services to landowners and land users in conjunction with the
installation of terraces, diversions, grassed waterways,
stabilization structures, on-farm drainage and irrigation
systems, low hazard agricultural waste management systems, land
grading and leveling, and other conservation practices. These
services are considered support activities. To enhance the
working relationship between conservation contractors and NRCS, a
Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) has been signed between the
Land Improvement Contractors of America (LICA) and NRCS. A copy
of the MOU is located in Subpart E, Exhibit 505.41.

(2) NRCS is responsible for technical standards,

conservation planning and application, and the certification and
reporting of conservation practices. When technical services are
provided during the installation phase, the field office staff
will review the checkout and/or layout and other construction
documentation provided by the contractors to ensure that the
documentation submitted shows that the practices were installed
in accordance with the approved drawings and specifications.
Practice documentation is to comply with General Manual (GM) 450,
Part 407 - Documentation, Certification, and Spot-Checking.
Documentation aids may be developed by NRCS staff to assist
contractors in providing the necessary documentation.

(3) NRCS will ensure that the quality of services

provided by the contractor during the design phase meets NRCS
program needs and technical standards. Contractor developed
designs will be reviewed for technical adequacy by an individual
having engineering job approval authority for the work.

505-6
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

(4) The state conservationist will establish procedures

to make random, periodic field checks and quality reviews
(330-GM, Part 405) to assure that practices were installed in
accordance with the documentation furnished by the contractor and
approved drawings and specifications. Records will be maintained
in the field office to document that the contractor provides
services meeting NRCS standards.

(5) In the event a deficiency exists with the

contractor's documentation or installation, the policies
expressed in GM-340, Part 405, apply. In addition to notifying
the participant or owner, the field office staff shall work with
the contractor to satisfactorily resolve the issues. A
satisfactory resolution will range from correcting a simple error
or misunderstanding to not accepting future documentation until
such documentation is submitted in an accurate, acceptable
manner.

(6) Upon request from a contractor, the field office

staff will furnish to that contractor information related to
acceptance of his or her work by NRCS. The sample letter shown
in Subpart E - Exhibits 505.42, should be used in responding to
the contractor. The practices and elements of work performed
(construction of a practice and checkout, layout, and/or design
documentation) are shown as examples only. Each letter will be
tailored to identify the acceptance of construction and
documentation for the individual contractor. This information is
protected by the Privacy Act from unwarranted disclosure and may
not be divulged by NRCS to any individual or organization other
than the contractor to whom it pertains. Exceptions to this
require approval of the Freedom of Information Officer.

505.11 Project activities.

(a) Scope. Engineering services for work in project

activities are provided by NRCS or by non-NRCS engineering
staffs, including sponsoring local organizations, State agencies,
or other units of government; private engineers under contract
with NRCS; and private engineers under contract with sponsoring
local organizations.

505-7
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

(b) Staffing. NRCS must have an adequate staff of engineers

and other personnel to maintain a technically sound program and
rate of progress consistent with the intent Qf the Congress and
the Administration. The engineering staff should be large enough
for the normal workload of preparing plans, making field surveys
and investigations, preparing construction drawings and
specifications, and inspecting construction. For some projects,
part of this workload is performed by non-NRCS sources.
Sponsoring local organizations may elect to provide engineering
services.

(c) Use of non-NRCS engineering services. Non-NRCS

engineering services contracted by NRCS or sponsoring local
organizations are used to perform:

(1) Engineering work in excess of the amounts NRCS and

sponsoring local organizations can do because of peak loads
greater than normal seasonal peaks.

(2) Unusual kinds of work for which NRCS and the

sponsoring local organizations lack the necessary facilities or
specialized knowledge.

(3) Engineering services for which sponsoring local

organizations elect to employ private engineers.

(4) Consulting services and special studies such as

review and evaluation of engineering data, independent safety
reviews for design of dams, consultation in design of complex or
unusual structures, and hydraulic model studies.

(5) Certain engineering and architectural services for

basic facilities for recreation or fish and wildlife and for
municipal and industrial water supply.

(d) Inspections. Local organizations provide for all

inspections of features not paid for from NRCS funds. NRCS
inspects features whose malfunction or failure could adversely
affect portions of the work that are paid from NRCS funds. When
inspection of construction paid from NRCS funds is performed by

505-8
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

other than NRCS personnel, the NRCS representative provides such

supervision as necessary to ensure that the inspection is
adequate and that the work meets the requirements of the
construction contract. Inspection of construction in which NRCS-
administered funds are invested is usually provided by NRCS.
These services may be provided by others if one of the following
circumstances prevails:

(1) Qualified NRCS personnel are not available.

(2) The work was designed by non-NRCS engineers because

NRCS did not have the skills to do the design work.

(3) The work is principally financed by the sponsoring

local organization or other non-NRCS interest.

(4) The work includes installations or parts of

installations requiring specialized knowledge and experience not
available in NRCS.

(e) Recreation and fish and wildlife facilities. Basic

facilities for recreation or fish and wildlife are planned by
sponsoring local organizations, by private engineers or other
professionals, or by NRCS. These facilities are designed by
sponsoring local organizations, by private engineers, or other
professionals, not by NRCS.

(1) Standard plans developed by State or Federal agencies

and approved by NRCS can be used as guides. Criteria for
facilities for which no standards are available must be
established by conference of the interested parties.

(2) Basic facility plans must be detailed enough to

establish the general location and size of the major elements and
the types and approximate quality and quantity of the various
features and to provide reasonable estimates of costs.

(3) The general location and size of the major elements

and the types, quality, and quantity of the various features of

505-9
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

basic facilities are to be designed in conformance with the

information in the plan.

(4) NRCS review of the design documents, drawings and

specifications is limited to that needed to determine that they
clearly specify the work to be done; they are consistent and
compatible with all other provisions of the contract document;
the facilities conform to the details established in the work
plan; and public health and safety are protected.

(f) Single-purpose municipal and industrial water supply.

NRCS does not provide or contract for engineering services for
planning, design or installation of single-purpose structures for
municipal and industrial water supply.

(g) Multiple-purpose municipal and industrial water supply.

Multiple-purpose structures for municipal and industrial water
supply can have provisions for flood control, irrigation water
management, recreation, fish and wildlife, water quality
management, or any combination of these or other purposes. The
division of engineering work among NRCS and others depends on
which purposes are included.

(1) In the planning stage, if storage of water for

municipal or industrial use is proposed in a multiple-purpose
structure, the sponsoring local organization provides or
contracts for engineering services at non-NRCS cost. This
includes all surveys and investigations necessary to determine
what storage volume is needed for municipal and industrial water,
whether the water yield and quality are adequate, and whether the
proposed structure will hold water without undue loss. The
sponsoring local organization or a non-NRCS engineering source
employed by the local organization also plans all water control
features required exclusively for the municipal and industrial
water and all other features for which NRCS cost sharing is not
authorized.

(i) NRCS makes or contracts for studies of water yield

and quality, and potential seepage loss or gain of reservoirs.
The data are used to evaluate the feasibility of storing water

505-10
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

for irrigation, recreation, fish and wildlife, water quality

management, or any other purpose for which NRCS cost sharing is
provided.

(ii) To avoid duplication of effort, NECS and the

sponsoring local organizations share and exchange information.
If similar studies are needed for the various purposes,
independent studies shall be made as each considers necessary.

(iii) NRCS makes or contracts for all foundation

investigations and other needed studies in addition to those
provided by the sponsoring local organization. This ensures that
the proposed structure can be constructed at a reasonable cost,
will be safe, and will perform the functions for which NRCS cost
sharing is provided.

(2) In the design stage, non-NRCS engineering services

are used for multiple-purpose structures with municipal or
industrial water supply features. These services include, but
are not limited to, field surveys, geologic and soil
investigations, design studies and computations, and preparation
of construction drawings and specifications.

(i) NRCS does not perform engineering work for the

design of structures for municipal or industrial water; even if
the work is paid for in part by NRCS funds.

(ii) The Chief may consider exceptions to this rule, at

the request of sponsoring local organizations and on submission
of justification, if the storage volume for municipal and
industrial water is less than 20 percent of the total water
storage volume.

505.12 River basin studies.

River basin studies are overall studies and assessments of

water and related land resources, regional and river basin plans
of a preliminary or reconnaissance nature, and implementation
studies of program or project feasibility. In overall studies

505-11
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

and in regional and river basin planning, NRCS usually provides

the engineering services or consultative assistance to others
performing the work. In implementation studies of program or
project feasibility, engineering services can be provided by NRCS
and/or non-NRCS sources.

505.13 Engineering services not provided by NRCS.

(a) Frequently engineering services that NRCS does not

provide are needed for carrying out NRCS programs. Cooperating
individuals, groups, and organizations must arrange for such
services from non-NRCS sources.

(b) Among the services NRCS engineers do not provide are the
following:

(1) Boundary or location surveys for legal purposes,

unless the state conservationist has determined that providing
such service in a State meets the requirements of the State
Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors Board.

(2) Representation of drainage or irrigation districts or

similar enterprises in legal proceedings required by State laws,
unless non-NRCS sources are not available and the state
conservationist presents justification acceptable to the Chief.

(3) Obtaining water rights or filing applications with

regulating agencies for pollution abatement facilities, except as
provided in 130 (Agency General) Part 400.

505-12
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

SUBPART C - CRITERIA

505.20 Non-project activities.

NRCS encourages conservation district cooperators and others

whom it assists to follow applicable NRCS standards when
conservation work is done for them by private engineers. If
Federal cost sharing or technical assistance is provided, the
work must comply with NRCS standards.

505.21 Project activities.

(a) Non-NRCS engineering services provided under contract

with NRCS usually require the use of NRCS standard drawings,
specifications, and design criteria.

(b) Sponsoring local organizations that elect to furnish

engineering services for work cost-shared by NRCS are to be
encouraged to use applicable NRCS standard drawings,
specifications, and design criteria, but may use other drawings,
specifications, and design criteria acceptable to NRCS, as agreed
to prior to a design start. The quality of all work
(performance, durability, safety, and economy) must be equal to
the quality required by the NRCS standards. Drawings and
specifications must be compatible with the general provisions and
special provisions to be used in the construction contract.

505-13
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

SUBPART D - PROCEDURES

505.30 Engineering services, contracts, and agreements.

(a) If NRCS contracts directly for engineering services, the

appropriate Architect-Engineer Evaluation Board selects the best
qualified sources and establishes the order of priority for
negotiating purposes (NRCS Procurement Regulation 41-4.1004). The
contracting officer negotiates the contract. If the sponsoring
local organization is to pay a part of the cost of the work
performed under an NRCS contract, an agreement for services is
required.

(b) If NRCS provides funds for engineering performed by a

sponsoring local organization or by a private source engaged by a
sponsoring local organization, an agreement for services is
required. If a sponsoring local organization elects to employ a
private source whose services will be paid for with NRCS funds,
the state administrative officer and the state conservation
engineer assist in selection and negotiation.

(c) If higher level of approval for the practice or project

is required, the specifications for engineering services
contracts and agreements are to be prepared jointly and
contractual negotiations are not to be initiated until
concurrence is received.

(d) Instructions for preparing and negotiating engineering

services contracts and agreements are given in the Administrative
Services Handbook, Federal and NRCS procurement regulations.
Detailed guidance in the engineering aspects of preparing and
negotiating engineering services contracts is provided in the
National Contracts, Grants, and Cooperative Agreements Manual.

505.31 Selection of non-NRCS engineering services.

(a) If non-NRCS engineering services are to be paid for by

NRCS, whether the contract is negotiated by NRCS or by a
sponsoring local organization, NRCS is responsible for proper
expenditure of funds and will assist in the selection and
negotiation. The cost of non-NRCS engineering services must be

505-14
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

reasonable compared to the cost of using NRCS engineering

services, considering any differential between private and public
costs.

(b) Non-NRCS engineering sources must be approved by the

state administrative officer and the state conservation engineer
and must meet the following requirements:

(1) Registration is necessary in the State in which the

work is to be undertaken if registration is required by State
law, and non-NRCS engineering sources must be properly authorized
to practice in compliance with other State laws.

(2) They must have had satisfactory experience in the

kind of engineering work to be undertaken and must be available
to supervise the work directly.

(3) They must have the necessary facilities and staff to

do the work in the specified time.

505.32 Responsibility for engineering services performed under

engineering services, contracts, and agreements.

(a) Non-NRCS sources performing engineering services bear

the primary responsibility for the soundness and adequacy of
engineering services. NRCS and sponsoring local organizations
also assume certain responsibilities in setting criteria for the
work, in financing and sponsoring it, and in reviewing,
approving, and accepting it.

(1) Approval and acceptance of the work by NRCS or by the

local organization does not absolve the non-NRCS sources of
responsibility. The extent of their responsibility depends on
the nature of the services required. There are three general
kinds of non-NRCS engineering services:

(i) Routine design and drafting or other routine work

strictly following NRCS criteria, standards, and instructions.
The non-NRCS source is responsible for errors or deficiencies in
the prepared designs, drawings, and specifications.

505-15
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

(ii) Engineering services requiring professional

experience and judgment. The contract may require that NRCS
criteria and standards be followed insofar as they are applicable
but the non-NRCS source is expected to make independent
decisions. To the extent that the contract requires, the source
furnishing services of this kind is held responsible for the
soundness and adequacy of the designs, drawings, specifications,
and other services performed under the contract. A professional
is responsible to the public in general for safe and sound
engineering services.

(iii) Engineering services outside the realm of NRCS

knowledge and experience. A contract for design work of this
kind usually provides for construction inspection by those
responsible for the design. When this is the case, in accepting
the work, NRCS relies largely on the competence and dependability
of the professional.

(2) A contract for design work under 505.32(a)(1)(ii) or

(iii) normally provides for services during construction, whether
the non-NRCS source performs the inspection or not. These
services include concurrence in any deviations from the design.
The source must be permitted to retain control over the design if
they are to be held responsible for it, and any changes made
without their concurrence tend to relieve them of responsibility.
Basic design changes are not to be made until approved by the
professional responsible for the design. Approval of minor
deviations and corrections that become necessary during
construction is to be obtained as quickly as practical, but
construction should not be delayed to await approval unless there
is reason to doubt that the change will be approved.

(3) If engineering services are furnished by a sponsoring

local organization under an agreement for services, the
sponsoring local organization assumes responsibility for
soundness and adequacy of the work. This applies to services
performed by the local organization itself as well as to services
performed by others under contract with the local organization.
NRCS approval and acceptance of the work does not relieve the
local organization of its responsibility. If problems caused by
a deficiency in engineering services furnished by a sponsoring

505-16
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

local organization arise during or after construction of any

works of improvement, NRCS holds the local organization liable
for any damage to others that may result and for any additional
construction costs to correct the situation.

(b) If NRCS-administered Federal construction funds are

paid, or works of improvement paid by NRCS funds are affected,
NRCS is responsible for protection of the government1s interest;
namely, the works of improvement must satisfactorily and safely
perform the functions for which funds are invested. The
performance of engineering services and assumption of attendant
responsibility by non-NRCS sources does not relieve NRCS of this
responsibility.

(1) If the detailed construction inspection of work paid

from NRCS funds is performed by other than NRCS personnel, the
NRCS representative is to verify that the work complies with the
requirements of the construction contract. Such verification
requires spot checking of inspection procedures, continuous
review of job records and reports, and periodic observation of
the work.

(2) NRCS engineering job approval authority (Part 501,

Subpart A) is the same for engineering work done by non-NRCS
sources as for work done by NRCS.

(3) NRCS is not liable for damages or additional costs

caused by deficient or improper investigations, designs, or other
engineering services performed by others.

505-17
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

SUBPART E - EXHIBITS

505.40 Exchange of technical services between NRCS and FS.

USDA Memorandum of Understanding

For
Exchange of Technical Services
Between
Natural Resources Conservation Service
And
Forest Service

Signed January 17, 1979

1. PURPOSE
The purpose of this agreement is to establish procedures for an
exchange of technical services between the Natural Resources
Conservation Service (NRCS) and the Forest Service (FS). Either
agency may provide technical assistance depending on the
location, scope, and complexity of the work and the availability
of necessary skills. This interdepartmental agreement will not
alter and/or change the delegations of authority or agency policy
of practice in the planning, design, installation, or maintenance
of works of improvement. The intent of this exchange is to
expedite and improve technical work of the agencies by utilizing
the expertise of the personnel skills of both agencies and by
enhancing on-the-job training.

2. SCOPE

This agreement applies to the exchange of technical services for

training, consultation, and review relating to planning, design,
installation, and maintenance of dams, roads, sanitary
facilities, and other related natural resource protection
activities. The exchange can include but is not limited to
technical assistance in landscape architecture, geology,
engineering, biology, plant sciences, and other natural resource
discipline areas.

3. PROCEDURE
FS regional foresters and/or area directors and NRCS state
conservationists are normally responsible for initiating and

505-18
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

coordinating agency requests for assistance. If assistance

involves more than one State or more than one FS Region or Area,
the coordination will include the Chief of the NRCS and the Chief
of the FS.

Informal interagency consultation between technical specialists

is currently encouraged and practiced. Assistance that may
require a significant amount of time expenditure or obligation of
other resources should be requested in writing. The request is
to include sufficient information for the assisting agency to
determine the scope of work and the extent of resources needed to
complete the task. If reimbursement for actual costs is
required, provisions for reimbursement are to be outlined in an
exchange agreement for the task.

Work performed under the terms of the exchange agreement is to

follow normal agency approval procedures. Each agency will
coordinate for any required higher level reviews and approvals.

Assistance resulting from a written request is to be documented

in the form of a technical report to identify the scope of work,
report the results of studies or analyses, and make
recommendations.

Work performed under exchange agreements is to be accomplished

using the criteria of the assisting agency that are appropriate
for the size and type of project. Generally, FS and NRCS
criteria and standards are compatible. If during the course of
the work, criteria variations become evident and/or normal
practices are determined to not apply, the two agencies are to
agree on their applicability before the final report is prepared.
The final decision on the adequacy of the work And the adoption
of recommendations is be made by the requesting agency.

4. SUPPLEMENTS

As necessary to adapt to local conditions, this memorandum of

understanding may be supplemented at the State level by agreement
between the state conservationist and the appropriate regional
forester or area director.

505-19
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

5. DURATION

This memorandum of understanding becomes effective on the date of

the last affixed signature and continues in effect until
terminated in writing by either party after providing sixty (60)
days' notice to the other.

/S/John R. McGuire, Chief /s/J. w. Haas, acting for

Forest Service, USDA R.M. Davis, Administrator
Soil Conservation Service, USDA

DATE: January 17, 1979 DATE: December 28, 1978

505-20
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

SUBPART E – EXHIBITS

505.41 Memorandum of Understanding between LICA and NRCS.

MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING
between
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE (NRCS)
and
LAND IMPROVEMENT CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA (LICA)

I. PURPOSE

This Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) is between the Natural

Resources Conservation Service of the United States Department of
Agriculture, hereinafter called NRCS; and the Land Improvement
Contractors of America, hereinafter called LICA.

This MOU establishes the joint and individual interests of the

two parties in the application of natural resources conservation
practices. Effective cooperation can aid significantly in
advancing the missions of both parties and in achieving increased
efficiency in the application of conservation practices.

II. GENERAL

Under the provisions of Public Law 74-46, 49 Stat. 163, NRCS

was established to provide technical assistance in controlling
and preventing soil erosion. This assistance is provided through
a variety of technical assistance and cost-share programs. It is
essential that conservation practice application with NRCS
assistance meet minimum NRCS standards.

NRCS is responsible for certifying that conservation practices

meet minimum NRCS standards and specifications. NRCS cannot
delegate this responsibility. To assist in the efficient
application of conservation practices, NRCS can use documentation
furnished by contractors to support the certification process.

505-21
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

III. RESPONSIBILITIES

A. NRCS AGREES TO:

1. Provide or assist with training contractors in

surveying, design, layout, and construction checks of
conservation practices in accordance with the availability of
resources.

2. Furnish to any contractor, upon request, only such

information as related to his/her acceptance by NRCS of
previously submitted surveying, design, layout and/or
construction check documentation of conservation practices. This
information may be obtained from the local NRCS employee
responsible for certifying that conservation practices have been
installed in accordance with NRCS standards and specifications.
The contractor may provide this information to LICA and others.

3. Approve all designs and randomly field check

contractor's layout and/or construction checks. In the event
that random field checks reveal a deficiency in the contractor's
layout and/or construction check of a given conservation
practice, the NRCS employee responsible for certifying
conservation practices in his/her work area will notify the
contractor that his/her documentation is no longer acceptable for
NRCS certification of that specific practice.

B. LICA AGREES TO:

1. Promote and, where possible, participate in training

contractors in surveying, design, layout, and construction checks
of conservation practices.

2. Provide guidance and leadership to local chapters of

LICA in the training of contractors.

3. Encourage contractors to provide designs for NRCS

approval and to submit layout and construction check
documentation to NRCS for certification of practices for programs
and activities for which NRCS is responsible.

505-22
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

4. Promote a program among the local chapters of LICA

that recognizes the knowledge and skills of contractors in
surveying, design, layout, and/or c9nstruction check of
conservation practices.

C. IT IS MUTUALLY AGREED THAT:

1. Training activities outlined in this MOU will be

voluntary and available to LICA members and non-members alike.
NRCS will accept contractor documentation from either LICA
members or non-members. Participation in training sponsored by
LICA, NRCS, or any other organization or group is not a
requirement for accepting contractor documentation. NRCS
accepted documentation is based on demonstrated competency of the
contractor to furnish neat, accurate notes showing that the
practices installed meet the design requirements and NRCS
standards and specifications.

2. The program or activities conducted under MOU will be

in compliance with the nondiscrimination provisions contained in
the Titles VI and, VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as
amended; the Civil Rights Restoration Act of 1987 (Public Law
100-259); and other nondiscrimination statues: namely, Section
504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Title IX of the Education
Amendments of 1972, and the Age Discrimination Act of 1975. They
will also be in accordance with regulations of the Secretary of
Agriculture (7 CFR-15, Subparts A & B), which provide that no
person in the United States shall on the grounds of race, color,
national origin, age, sex, religion, martial status, or handicap
be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or
be otherwise subjected to discrimination under any program or
activity receiving Federal financial assistance from the
Department of Agriculture or any agency thereof.

3. This MOU shall become effective upon the date of the

last signature affixed hereto and remain in full force and effect
indefinitely. It will be reviewed every five years from the
effective date and amended, if necessary, by duly authorized
officials of LICA and NRCS. This MOU may be terminated by either
party hereto through a 30-calendar-day written notice to the
other party.

505-23
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

4. The activities under this MOU will be in compliance

with Title V of the Drug-Free Workplace Act of 1988, 41 U.S.C.
702, and 7 CFR, Part 3017, Subpart F

5. This MOU defines in general terms the basis on which

the signatory agencies will cooperate, 'and as such, does not
institute a financial obligation to serve as a basis for
expenditures. Expenditure of funds, human resources, equipment,
supplies, facilities, training, public information and expertise
will be provided for by each signatory agency to the extent that
their participation is required and resources are available. Any
exchange of funds between the parties must be executed by a
separate agreement.

LAND IMPROVEMENT CONTRACTORS U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

OF AMERICA (LICA) NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION
SERVICE (NRCS)

/s/PAUL SANDEFUR /S/PAUL W. JOHNSON

President Chief

DATE: 2/20/97 DATE: 2/15/97

505-24
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

SUBPART E - EXHIBITS

505.42 Conservation contractor - sample letter.

USDA
NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE
400 Water Street
Anytown, Anystate 00000

Current Date

Name
Address

Dear:

As you requested on November 5, 1997, I am furnishing you this

office's acceptance of your construction and documentation of
conservation practices installed by farmers and ranchers in this
county. Our acceptance is based on a review of the documentation
you submitted and our field review of your work. The practices
are:

Ponds - Construction only

Terraces - Construction and checkout documentation
Grassed Waterways - Construction and checkout documentation
Diversions - Construction, layout, and checkout documentation
Land leveling - Construction, design, layout, and checkout
documentation

We commend you and greatly appreciate your efforts and

cooperation in promoting and installing high quality conservation
practices in this county.

Thank you for your support in protecting our soil and water
resources.

Sincerely,

District Conservationist

505-25
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

SUBPART E - EXHIBITS

505.43 Landowner use of a consultant - sample letter.

USDA
NATURAL RESOURCES CONSERVATION SERVICE
400 Water Street
Anytown, Anystate 00000

Current Date
Name
Address

Dear

You have requested cost sharing from the Farm Service Agency
(FSA) for practice 313, Waste storage Facility. You have
indicated that your system will be designed by a private
consultant. The Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS)
welcomes the involvement of your consultant. However, you need
to be aware that the NRCS will require that the consultant be
responsible for meeting NRCS standards and specifications and for
certifying the work.

There are certain items which must be submitted to the NRCS to

meet this requirement. These items are outlined in this letter.
We hope this will provide a clear understanding for all parties
involved and prevent any possible misunderstanding. The
following items are needed.

Prior to construction

1. A waste utilization plan must be prepared. I will be able

to assist you with this plan.

2. You need to submit the following items prepared by the

consultant to the NRCS:

a. A copy of the signed engineering plans which meet NRCS

standards. In addition to the Professional Engineer's
certification, the plans shall contain the following statement:
"To the best of my professional knowledge, judgment and belief,
these plans meet applicable NRCS standards and specifications."

b. A copy of the design engineer's cost estimate.

505-26
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 505 - NON-NRCS ENGINEERING SERVICES

c. A copy of an inspection plan which describes inspection

items and qualifications of those doing the inspection.

3. You are responsible for obtaining all permits (State

Pollution Control Agency, Watershed District, County zoning,
etc.) and contacting all utility companies with facilities in the
work area.

During Construction

1. You are responsible for hiring the contractor and ensuring

that the inspection plan is carried out and that the structure is
completed according to the approved plan and specifications.

2. Changes during construction will need to be approved by

the consultant and noted on "as-built" drawings.

After Construction

1. Upon completion, you must submit to NRCS a copy of the

"as-built" drawings, a certification statement signed by your
consultant, and a copy of any construction documentation required
in the inspection plan. The certification statement should read,
"To the best of my professional knowledge, judgment and belief,
the installed practice meets NRCS standards" and should be signed
by the engineer who designed it.

2. NRCS will make a field visit to the site and will certify
completion to FSA based on the consultants certification
statement.

3. You will need to follow the Operation and Maintenance Plan

for the system.

I hope this letter fully explains NRCS expectations. If you

have any questions, please call me.

Sincerely,

District Conservationist

cc:

505-27
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 506 – TECHNICAL MATERIALS

506.00 General.

National conservation engineering technical materials

including, in generic terms, documents, drawings, and computer
programs, have been developed and refined over many years. These
materials reflect NRCS technical expertise, experience, and
procedures in the engineering, geologic, and landscape
architecture disciplines. Most of these engineering materials
are developed to serve as permanent references for providing
technical assistance across the range of agency programs. Other
engineering materials are produced to provide information to the
public on agency projects and practices.

506.01 Definition of Terms.

(a) Working definitions for elements of conservation

engineering technical materials include,

(1) Policy- A statement of an adopted and definitive course

of action.

(2) Criteria- A policy statement of specific quantitative

technical requirements that can contain reference to procedures.
As a policy statement, criteria by definition is a subset of
policy.

(3) Standard- A statement of acceptable quality or technical

excellence in terms of both form and function (performance),
usually expressed in terms of limits, i.e. minimum or maximum.

(4) Conservation Practice- A structural measure, a vegetative

measure, or a management activity used to protect, enhance, or
manage soil, water, air, plant, or animal resources.

(5) Conservation Practice Standard- A set of statements

(criteria) that establish the acceptable level of quality for
planning, designing, constructing, operating, and maintaining
conservation practices.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

506-1
 PART 506 – TECHNICAL MATERIALS

(6) Guide- A compendium of information or series of options

that does not recommend a specific course of action.

(7) Procedure- A method of analysis that can be either a

technical or administrative process methodology. It contains a
series of steps to be taken to determine a result for a desired
objective.

(8) Specification- An explicit set of requirements to be

satisfied by a material, product, system, or service, such as
construction. It also identifies the methods for determining
whether each of the requirements is satisfied.

(9) Conservation Practice Specification- A general or site-

specific document that establishes the technical details and
workmanship required to install the practice in accordance with
the practice standard.

506.02 Organization of Permanent Materials.

(a) Permanent National engineering materials have been issued

in the past under a wide variety of titles, formats, and
organizations, including National Engineering Handbook Sections
(NEH), Technical Releases (TR), Field Manuals, Design Notes,
Specification Notes, etc.

(b) NRCS currently utilizes an agency-wide, coordinated system

to organize, issue, and manage all of its permanent documents.
This system is detailed in the General Manual (120-403) under
Subpart A - Directives.

(c) All materials in the Directives system are numbered. The

terminology for the numbering system is:
ttt-ppp.ccss

where,

ttt = title number (210 for engineering, etc)

ppp = part number (5xx or V-xxx for topical manuals, etc)
cc = chapter number
ss = section number

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

506-2
 PART 506 – TECHNICAL MATERIALS

(d) Within this NRCS Directives System, all permanent

engineering materials will be organized into the following:

(1) General Manual (GM)- The GM is used to issue policy that

applies to all offices within the scope of the issuing office.
Engineering Parts of the GM are numbered as 210-4xx.

(2) National Engineering Manual (NEM)- The NEM is a topical

manual used to issue policy for engineering work and is
distributed to offices providing engineering assistance. Parts
of the NEM are numbered as 210-5xx.

(3) National Engineering Handbook (NEH)- The NEH is a topical

handbook used to issue detailed “how-to” instructions, (i.e.
procedures, guides and specifications). Parts are distributed to
offices that need the material. Parts of the NEH are numbered as
210-6xx.

(4) National Handbook of Conservation Practices (NHCP)- The

NHCP is also a topical handbook used to issue National
Conservation Practice Standards and Specifications. This
material is established as agency policy and criteria via cross
reference in the General Manual. The NHCP is numbered as 450-VI-
NHCP.

(5) Automated Systems- This category is used to issue user

guides and other documentation for NRCS developed software
applications and databases to all offices that use the automated
systems. Parts for engineering applications are numbered as 210-
7xx.

(6) Instructions (3xx) are also available to issue

information, but are seldom used for engineering technical
materials. Refer to 120-403.

(e) The National Engineering Handbook (NEH) has been

established to provide a unified topical handbook for all
permanent conservation engineering procedures, guides and
specifications, except those covered in the NHCP. The purpose is
to provide a uniform framework for locating technical references,
eliminating duplication of distributed materials, and managing
the development of new materials. All new or revised technical

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

506-3
 PART 506 – TECHNICAL MATERIALS

procedures and specifications shall be titled and developed as an

integral part of the NEH.

(1) The primary table of contents for the NEH shall parallel
the table of contents for this NEM in part names and Part
numbers, except Part numbers will be 6xx. The primary table of
contents for the NEH will also contain additional part names and
part numbers for field handbooks which contain engineering
material, but are intended primarily for use by non-engineers.

(2) The secondary table of contents for the NEH can be

different from the NEM in Chapter titles and numbers, and will be
adjusted as new procedures or specifications are added to any
part.

506.03 Metrication

(a) The transition to the use of metric units in all government

publications has been mandated by Acts of Congress and
Presidential Orders.

(b) Approved metric units are referenced in ASTM E380

“Standard Practice for the Use of the International System of
Units (SI)”. The abbreviation SI is derived from the French
“Système International d’Unités and is used in all languages.

(c) During this transition period, every new or revised

engineering document shall include approved metric units.
Documents should be prepared to either:

(1) use both approved metric units and common inch-pound

units such that either set of units are acceptable for consistent
use throughout the document, or

(2) use common inch-pound units and include acceptable metric

units for information.

(d) Conversion between inch-pound and metric units may be hard

or soft conversion depending on industry practice and available
equipment or materials.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

506-4
 PART 506 – TECHNICAL MATERIALS

(1) Soft conversion is the process of changing the

description of an existing measurement without a significant
change in size or magnitude.

(2) Hard conversion is the process of changing the

description of an existing measurement with a change in the size
of an existing object or the magnitude of an existing quantity to
obtain standard, convenient, rounded, or rationalized dimensions.

(e) Dual units should be shown as inch-pound units with metric

units in (parenthesis) when the metric conversion is soft, and
metric units in [brackets] when the metric conversion is hard.

506.04 Developing NEH Materials.

(a) The development or major revision of national engineering

technical materials should follow an organized process in order
to,

(1) focus efforts on priority Agency needs,

(2) involve appropriate disciplines and staffs,

(3) plan the scope of the final product, and

(4) assure organized integration into the NEH.

(b) Anyone working with national technical materials can

propose development or revision of any NEH materials that are
needed to provide technical assistance under Agency programs.
Anyone that has developed technical materials for State or
regional use can also propose refinement of the material for
National use and inclusion into the NEH. All proposals should be
directed to the State Conservation Engineer for consideration.
The State Conservation Engineer should forward important
proposals on to the Director of Conservation Engineering.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

506-5
 PART 506 – TECHNICAL MATERIALS

506.05 Distribution of Materials within NRCS.

Initial distribution of national technical material and

distribution of amendments, revisions, etc, will be in accordance
with distributions established from field needs.

506.06 Distribution of Materials outside NRCS.

NRCS offices at all levels are to respond to requests for

engineering technical materials from non-NRCS individuals or
organizations. Generally, requests are to be referenced to the
National Technical Information Service (NTIS) where NRCS
technical materials are available for sale. Copies may be made
available to Federal, State, and local agencies, individuals with
whom NRCS has established a professional relationship,
contractors working with NRCS, and others who may be involved
with NRCS programs and contracts.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

506-6
 SUBCHAPTER B - MANAGEMENT

PART 510 - PLANNING

510.00 General
510.01 Planning scope.
510.02 Documentation.
510.03 Engineering data to support plans.
510.04 Criteria.
510.05 Cost estimates.
510.06 Post design life considerations.

PART 511 - DESIGN

SUBPART A - PROCEDURES

511.00 General.
511.01 Design objectives.
511.02 Design stages.
511.03 Operating procedures.
511.04 Design analysis.
511.05 Design checking and review.
511.06 Independent reviews.
511.07 Design criteria.
511.08 Construction plans.

SUBPART B - DOCUMENTATION

511.10 Scope.
511.11 Design folders.

SUBPART C - INSTRUMENTATION

511.20 General.
511.21 Scope.
511.22 Need for reliable instruments.
511.23 Use of instrumentation.
511.24 Instrumentation plans.
511.25 Instrumentation monitoring and reporting.

PART 512 - CONSTRUCTION

SUBPART A - INTRODUCTION

512.00 General.

(210-V NEM, Second Edition, Amend. 24, Dec. 1997)

i
512.01 Scope.
512.02 Definitions.
512.03 Value Engineering.

SUBPART B - PRECONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

512.10 Selection of contractor.

512.11 Site showing.
512.12 Evaluation of bidder(s).
512.13 Preconstruction conference.
512.14 Partnering.

SUBPART C - EVALUATION OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

512.20 General.
512.21 Evaluation procedures.
512.22 Waivers of material certification.
512.23 Prequalification of materials.

SUBPART D - OUALITY ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES

512.30 General.
512.31 Definitions.
512.32 Quality assurance procedures.
512.33 Inspection of materials.

SUBPART E - EOUIPMENT, RECORDS, AND COORDINATION

512.40 Engineering equipment.

512.41 Records.
512.42 Coordination between disciplines.

SUBPART F - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

512.50 General.
512.51 Applicability.
512.52 Documentation.
512.53 Disposition.

PART 513 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

(Reserved)

(210-V NEM, Second Edition, Amend. 24, Dec. 1997)

ii
 PART 510 - PLANNING

510.00 General

Planning for the conservation and sustained use of natural

resources will often require engineering input which should be
provided early in the planning process. Planning should be in
sufficient detail to ensure that decisions by the landuser or
sponsor can be implemented without extensive changes in scope,
purpose, or cost. All plans shall be formulated with
consideration for their completeness, effectiveness, efficiency,
and acceptability. Additional guidance on specific NRCS
planning procedures can be found in the National Planning
Procedures Handbook (NPPH).

510.01 Planning scope

(a) The approach taken during a planning study will vary

according to the size and complexity of the issues involved.

(1) A simple practice, involving just one individual, may

possibly proceed rapidly through planning, design, construction,
and operation. However, even these measures must be planned
with due consideration for their impact on the larger system or
the plan for the area.

(2) More complex issues, involving a number of people

and/or ecological components, require more intense planning and
input from a number of individuals and organizations. For these
complex issues, several approaches and multiple alternatives
within those approaches may need to be developed and evaluated.

(b) The planning guidance in the NPPH is applicable to

planning for all NRCS programs. Plan content and criteria may
vary for each individual program or funding source.

(c) Preliminary engineering work may be needed during phases

I and II of the planning process outlined in the NPPH. The land
user or sponsor must understand the size, economics, and

510-1
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 510 - PLANNING

operational obligations for the alternatives being considered

before significant engineering resources are expended in more
detailed studies.

(d) Site investigations conducted during planning for

engineering measures are often less intense than those required
for final design. Final design investigations may reveal some
adverse conditions not identified during planning. Land users
or sponsors should be informed by NRCS staff that it is possible
that agreements reached on the details of planned measures,
needed landrights, and estimated costs in the planning phase may
require revision during final design and construction. Upstream
and downstream development that takes place after planning can
also greatly affect design.

(e) The data collected and the resulting analyses are to be

detailed adequately to aid in selecting alternatives.
Engineering job classes should be identified early to establish
proper engineering job approval authorities and an appropriate
review process. An individual having engineering job approval
authority for the practices being considered shall be consulted
during the planning process and shall sign the engineering plan.

(f) Expertise from all appropriate disciplines associated

with natural resource management should be involved as early as
possible in the planning process.

510.02 Documentation

Engineering investigations and analyses are to be documented.

Computations and other data supporting engineering decisions are
to be checked for accuracy and reasonableness by personnel with
adequate levels of expertise. Documentation provides for
expediting reviews, allows the work to progress smoothly into
final design and construction, and aids in post reviews. The
degree of supporting data should be commensurate with the
specific situation and the type of project planned. The data
are to be documented and filed in such a way that later
investigations for detailed design can build on and not repeat

510-2
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 510 - PLANNING

investigations and analyses accomplished during the planning

phase. All supporting documentation shall include the project
name and location, who performed the work, who checked the work,
the date of the work, and be initialed as being checked.

510.03 Engineering data to support plans

a) Sufficient engineering analysis shall be performed to

ensure that all engineering measures will function properly and
produce the planned results. Surveys, investigations, and
preliminary designs are to be detailed enough to prepare
necessary cost estimates, landrights requirements, etc.

(b) The size and complexity of planned actions will dictate

the detail required for the engineering report. The format and
content of the report will be designed to fit the needs of the
client. The report should clearly describe the problems,
investigations, alternatives, and conclusions. Graphics are to
be used as necessary to provide a clear understanding. The
final planning report should be tailored to meet program
requirements as appropriate. In all cases, the report must be
sufficient to document decisions in a professional manner.

(c) Review and approval is required for planning reports

containing engineering data and analysis. This review and
approval includes technical approval of the overall system of
engineering measures to ensure that they perform their planned
functions.

510.04 Criteria

(a) Current engineering standards and procedures are to be

used for planning all measures. The individual having
engineering job approval authority is to ensure that the
engineering measures included in the plan will function as
planned throughout their design life expectancy.

510-3
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 510 - PLANNING

(b) If revisions or modifications of plans are made, the

current criteria shall be used for at least the following:

(1) New structural measures not included in the original

plan.

(2) Structural measures modified enough to require a

supplement to the plan.

(3) Structural measures included in the approved plan

that, if built according to original criteria, would endanger
either new structural measures, existing structures, or ones
that are to be modified.

510.05 Cost estimates

All costs are to be determined, including installation costs

and expected periodic costs. Costs are to be current according
to the latest available information. The costs of engineering
measures generally include the following:

(a) Engineering. The direct cost of engineers and other

personnel for surveys, investigations, design, preparation of
plans and specifications, preparation of the operation and
maintenance plan, and the cost of inspection during
construction.

(b) Landrights. The actual cost or value of land required

for construction and operation of the measures, including
changes to fixed improvements.

(c) Water rights. The actual cost or value of water rights

required by local interests for carrying out the measure.

(d) Contract Administration. The expected cost of

administering the contracts, cost of permits, and any legal
costs.

(e) Construction. The expected cost of constructing the

measure. Construction estimates during planning should include

510-4
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 510 - PLANNING

specific estimates for all the identifiable components.

Contingencies should be included to allow for unforeseen
conditions and costs that are likely to be identified during the
final design and construction phases. Contingencies are
established according to the detail of planning. Higher
contingencies should be allowed for less detailed planning.

(f) Operation, maintenance and replacement. The cost

required to operate and maintain the measure including necessary
inspections and repairs for the planned life of the project.
Any items to be replaced during the evaluation period must be
included.

510.06 Post Design Life Considerations

At the end of their design life, some practices may create

safety, health and environmental concerns. Those issues should
be considered when alternatives are formulated and discussed
with the land users and/or sponsor. Costs for replacement,
rehabilitation, or decommissioning of these practices should be
anticipated, estimated to the extent possible, documented in the
plan report, and communicated to the landowner or sponsor.

510-5
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 511 - DESIGN

SUBPART A – PROCEDURES

511.00 General.

(a) Engineering design is an organized and rational process

that applies the natural laws of science for the enhancement of
human welfare. Engineering design should be sensitive to the
needs of people, their activities, and the landscape.

(b) Engineering design is done at many organizational and

geographic locations. The designs made are of varying complexity
and are often performed at locations some distance from the
construction site. The design is performed by personnel having
various levels of knowledge and skill. The designs often require
review and approval by someone at a location other than the
construction site or design office. Designs need to be reviewed
to insure adequate performance and safety. Because of the
diverse nature of the design activities in SCS, some
standardization of basic nomenclature and procedures is needed.

(c) The principles defined in this part apply to all sizes and
complexities of designs. The detail to which the procedures are
to be followed varies according to the need. The simplest
conservation practice may require only a few notes, computations,
and drawings. Larger and more complex works may require numerous
notes, computations, and drawings to complete all stages of the
design. Likewise, the complexity of site conditions and
engineering along with the number of alternatives and
organizational units affects the intensity and duration of work
at each design stage.

511.01 Design objectives.

Engineering design is to provide structural improvements having

the quality and durability required for the economic life of the
structure at the least total cost consistent with functional
requirements. Engineering designs are to be determined by
comparative design studies and cost estimates prepared with full
consideration of the landscape, topography, foundation, and other
site conditions including environmental quality, and the economy
and feasibility of construction, operation, and maintenance.
Economic comparisons of alternative designs are to be determined
by the amortized average annual cost of installation (including
costs of landrights), operation, and maintenance. Environmental
comparisons are to consider ecological, cultural, and aesthetic
values.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 6, August 1984)

511-1
 SUBPART A - PROCEDURES

511.02 Design stages.

(a) To provide standard terminology for orderly scheduling of

work and coordination with work, three stages of design activity
are defined. This terminology is to be used in all SCS
correspondence, publications, and documents relating to design.
The design activities included in these stages may be further
subdivided into phases or subphases as necessary to control SCS
work or to administer engineering services contracts and
agreements.

(b) On small and simple structural measures, all three stages

of design can be done in one brief period of time and in a manner
such that they are nearly inseparable. On larger works, such as
projects, much of the work in stages one and two may be done
during planning (510.01). Items for which the final design data
are known during planning, such as topographic, hydrologic, and
hydraulic features, should be completed for final design purpose
at that time. The planning data need then only be reviewed
before design commences in order to verify accuracy and adequacy.
In this manner, data gathered during planning can be used to
avoid duplication of effort and ensure that there is little or no
modification needed in the general layout during final design.
Similarly, data should be gathered on the geology and foundation
if assurance against significant cost changes is desired.

(c) Stage one includes data collection and evaluation for all
information on:
(1) Physical data. Topographic, hydrologic, visual,
biologic, geologic, and archeologic data.

(2) System and structure functional requirements and purpose.

The capacity, controlled water level, and location.

(3) Site constraints. Information on ownership boundaries

and water rights.

(d) Stage two is the preliminary design, which consists of

developing the general features of the works of improvement. It
includes selecting the most suitable types of structures, the
optimum layout and arrangement of the elements of the structural
system in the landscape, the types and locations of appurtenant
mechanical equipment, and, if applicable, the most feasible power
source. Also, cost studies and an economic feasibility
examination are to be made.

(1) Hydraulic design is to be sufficient to select alignment,

grade, size, and critical elevations for each evaluated
alternative.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 6, August 1984)

511-2
 SUBPART A - PROCEDURES

(2) Foundation conditions are to be analyzed and the

embankments designed in enough detail to satisfy seepage control
and stability requirements.

(3) Structural details of alternate designs are to be

developed sufficiently to prepare reasonable quantity and cost
estimates.

(4) Landscape resource objectives and preliminary landscape

resource designs and conceptual plans are to be developed
sufficiently to determine feasibility and prepare preliminary
cost estimates.

(5) Specifications of material and work requirements are to

be outlined, and a schedule of work and payment items is to be
included.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 6, Aug. 1984)

511-2A
 SUBPART A - PROCEDURES
(6) Cost estimates are to be determined by estimating
construction costs. Alternate designs are to be compared
according to the average annual cost of installation, operation,
and maintenance, including costs of land, easements, rights-of-
way, and relocation of roads and/or utilities.

(7) A report is to be compiled including all information

necessary to permit reviewing.

(e) Stage three is the final design, which consists of:

(1) Checking the adequacy of the surveys and investigations

and the accuracy of the layout chosen in the preliminary design.

(2) Refining and revising the preliminary design information.

(3) Detailing the layout and hydraulic design.

(4) Completing the structural design.

(5) Refining the landscape resources design.

(6) Preparing the construction drawings, contract

specifications, bid schedule, engineer's estimate, and
construction schedule.

(7) Preparing the design report.

(8) Preparing the operation and maintenance plan.

511.03 Operating procedures.

(a) The operating procedures to be followed depend on the

organizational level at which the design is done. If design is
done by many offices or by offices that are remote from one
another, the need for an established documented procedure is
greater. Designs made at field and area offices are usually
processed by simple informal procedures.

(b) The more complex designs often require technical assistance

and/or approval by the TSC. The design may be prepared:

(1) By the SCS state engineering staff (field, area, or state

office)

(2) By the TSC design section using data collected by state

staffs.

(3) By the engineering staff of a sponsoring local agency

under an agreement for engineering services.

(4) By a private engineer under a contract for engineering

services negotiated either by SCS or the sponsoring local agency.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

511-3
 PART 511 - DESIGN
(c) If it is anticipated that design will require assistance or
approval by the TSC, the state conservation engineer is to
evaluate the design scope of the engineering program in the state
and prepare a realistic design and construction schedule. In
addition, in cooperation with the head of the TSC engineering
staff, the state conservation engineer is to develop operating
procedures for preparing designs, construction drawings, and
specifications and for accomplishing their orderly and timely
review and approval (see 501.04). Each TSC is to keep the
Director of Engineering informed about the operating procedures.
Operating procedures are to comply with the following:

(1) The state engineering staff is responsible for all

surveys and investigations. The TSC engineering staff is to
provide technical assistance in planning the scope and nature of
such surveys and investigations if the TSC is to prepare the
final design.

(2) The work is to be done by the state engineering staff if

qualified design engineers are available.

(3) If the TSC is requested to furnish design assistance, the

state ordinarily is to complete the preliminary design.

(4) TSC assistance may be requested at any stage in the

preparation of the design.

(5) If local sponsoring agencies or consultants participate

in the preparation of design requiring TSC approval the
specifications for engineering services contracts and agreements
are to be prepared jointly by the state staff and the TSC
engineering staff.
(i) Engineering services specifications, payment schedules,
and performance time are to have TSC concurrence.
(ii) Performance time is to be adequate to permit timely
reviews at state and TSC levels.
(iii) Reviews are to be scheduled so that the responsible
state makes its review before the TSC review.
(6) Construction drawings and specifications are to be
prepared concurrently so that they can be properly coordinated.

(7) Contract specifications are to be compiled by the office

responsible for the design of the work.

(d) Operating procedures for continuity between employees

performing site investigation, design, and construction are not
complicated for small or simple jobs if the work is done at one
or two offices. However, if there are several offices and
employees involved or segments of the work are done by
specialists, maintaining continuity is much more difficult. In
these more complex operations, coordination and communication is
to be facilitated between engineers, geologists, and others
during stages

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

511-4
 SUBPART A - PROCEDURES

two and three of design and during construction. This is to be

done by the designer and/or soil engineer assisting the geologist
in planning and evaluating the site investigation. Field reviews
during the investigation may be necessary to be sure all
information needed for design is obtaind. Likewise, the designer
is to arrange for transfer of information to the construction
inspection staff. For more complex projects, the design and soil
engineers, geologist, construction engineer, and inspector may
meet to exchange information. This preconstruction meeting
should cover critical interpretation and assumptions dealing with
design features and those items that need verification during
construction.

511.04 Design analysis.

(a) The design analysis defines the scope of the design and
evaluates the relationships of the principles that determine the
design. It consists of a step-by-step description of the
procedures used. Each step is to be described concisely and
completely.

(b) The design analysis is to include the data used, the

criteria, and procedures. The design analysis is to be
technically sound, performed in a logical manner, and documented.

511.05 Design checking and review.

(a) Checking during design is essential. Checking consists of

an examination of narrative, computations, and drawings for
accuracy, conformation with procedures, and consistency between
the various parts of the design. The checker is to be
experienced in the type of design, the criteria, and the
procedures. The checker is to initial each sheet completed and
verify:

(1) That the basic data and assumptions were used in the
computations.
(2) That mathematic computations are accurate.
(3) That details are consistent from sheet to sheet.
(4) That drawings comply with the design.
(5) That drawings comply with the specifications.
(6) That computed critical elevations, costs, and quantities
are accurate.
(7) That construction drawings are complete.

(b) Reviews are to be made during design to ensure technical

quality. All designs, drawings, and specifications are to be
reviewed (see Part 501). Reviews are to be made progressively by
the responsible design office through an examination of
narrative, computations, and drawings. The reviewer assumes
responsibility with the designer for the functional

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

511-5
 PART 511 - DESIGN

adequacy and structural soundness of the structure or structural

system. The reviewer's capability is to be equal to that needed
to do the design. The review is to determine whether:
(1) The design provides for the planned purpose.
(2) The basic data are adequate.
(3) The design assumptions are valid.
(4) The methods of analysis are valid.
(5) Alternatives evaluated are equal in meeting minimum
performance requirements.
(6) The solution is appropriate to the problem or site
condition.
(7) The design complies with policy and criteria.
(8) The design is consistent with sound engineering practice.
(c) The review procedures depend upon the operating procedures
used for Class I through VIII jobs. The review procedures for
Class VI, VII, and VIII jobs are to be agreed on by the state
conservation engineer and the head of the TSC engineering staff.
The state conservation engineer is to ensure that the design
schedule provides enough time for review by the appropriate
authorities at the various design stages. Review schedules are
to reflect a realistic consideration of the locations of the
reviewing offices, time needed to transmit material, and
coordination of the work with the rest of the workload of the
offices.

511.06 Independent reviews.

Consideration is to be given to the need for an independent

review of dams and other engineering structures which, when
installed, will become a potential hazard to human life in case
of failure. See 520.26 for the procedure to be used for dams.
When necessary, a similar procedure should be used for other
structures.

§511.07 Design criteria.

(a) Design criteria established by policy directives are often

of a general nature. The criteria provide guidance in obtaining
the quality of work acceptable. Designs are to be prepared to
satisfy the functional purpose in a safe and stable manner, which
may often result in requiring more restrictive limits than the
established minimum criteria. In other words, meeting minimum
engineering criteria will not, in all cases, insure adequate
designs.

(b) Minimum design criteria established by policy are to be

met.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

511-6
 SUBPART A - PROCEDURES

(c) Criteria used in preparing project plans are normally used

in the design and construction of structural measures. At the
time of final design, the individual having the engineering job
approval authority (see 501.04) is to reaffirm that all aspects
of the engineering plans are legally permissible and that the
structure will perform its assigned function in a normal manner
during its service life. The design criteria are to be changed
from that used in planning if:

(1) The planned design is not acceptable in light of new

engineering knowledge as reflected in the revised criteria. In
this situation, the measure is to be designed to meet new
criteria.

(2) Downstream development requires a change in structure

classification before construction. In this situation, the
structure is to be reclassified and designed in accordance with
the latest criteria.

(d) The sponsors or landowners are to be informed of changes

that increase the cost or require alterations in landrights.

511.08 Construction plans.

(a) The preparation of construction plans is the final step in

the design process. The construction plans consist of drawings
and specifications. The drawings are a graphical description and
the specifications are the narrative description of the works to
be constructed. The plans are to provide descriptive information
on the quantity and quality of the completed work. The work is
to be clearly described so that the owner and constructor will
understand the requirements. This provides a mutual
understanding when the requirements are met.

(b) Construction drawings are to be prepared and assembled in

a clear and logical manner. The minimum requirements are
contained in Part 541.

(c) Construction specifications are to include both materials

and construction methods. The minimum requirements are contained
in Part 542. Requirements are to be established in terms of a
specified end product, not in terms of a method.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

511-7
 SUBPART B – DESIGN DOCUMENTATION

511.10 Scope.

Design folders are to be prepared for all designs within

approval categories VI, VII, and VIII (see Part 501) and all dams
that have importance for reasons of public safety (see 520.21
(f)).

511.11 Design folders.

(a) The folder is to contain the design analyses, design

report, construction drawings, specifications, bid schedule, and
plan for operation and maintenance. All notes, computations,
drawings, sketches, and other data are to be recorded neatly and
organized in a folder in a manner that allows reproduction and
incorporation in reports with a minimum of editing. Design
drawings, diagrams, graphs, sketches, or other pictorial
representations should be incorporated into the computation file
if the size and scale permit. Design drawings drawn on larger
sheets that cannot be folded to computation sheet size are to be
cited at the appropriate place in the computations by a notation
that fully identifies the drawing and its file location. The
design documents should be kept in a binder to keep them in
order.

(1) Design records are to be kept orderly and current to

allow for efficient review at any stage. They are to be complete
and understandable because they may be used for later actions
such as:

(i) Design changes required during construction.

(ii) Structural modification or addition during operation

or maintenance.

(iii) Investigation of performance.

(2) Design records are to document completely:

(i) The data gathered to demonstrate the physical,

chemical, and biological conditions at the site.

(ii) The purpose and function of works designed.

(iii) The standards, criteria, and limitations used as

design guidance.

(iv) The problem conditions to be considered.

(v) The qualitative and quantitative design analysis.

(b) Design resorts summarize in narrative form the design

objective, data, criteria, assumptions, procedures, and decisions
used in design. Selected structure dimensions, elevations,
capacities should be used to augment the narrative, but are not
to serve as a replacement.
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 2, Feb. 1981)
511-9
 PART 511 - DESIGN

Previously developed requirements established during the planning

phase are to be included by reference. Design reports may vary
in length from a brief synopsis to an extensive review. A design
report is to address the topics in the following list as
appropriate. The report should be commensurate with the design
complexity and significance; some items listed may not be
relevant, and if not, need not be included.

(1) Summary. A concise statement of the history and status of

design, previous reviews disposition of applicable policy items,
justification for departure from standards, receipt of waivers,
etc.

(2) Description of the job. A brief description of the major

features, hazard classification, drainage area, storm
frequencies, landscape resources, capacities, etc. Include any
variance from project plans.

(3) Design objective. A brief, clear statement that may be a

summary from a project plan. Differences identified from plans
must be supported by proper approvals.

(4) Basis for design. A listing of reference documents used

in design such as handbooks, codes, reports, studies, and
criteria.

(5) General basic data. Hazard analyses, seismic assessment,

and limiting conditions or restraints that may influence design,
construction, or facility operation.

(6) Location and layout. Consideration of site configuration

or landscape conditions that had an effect.

(7) Hydrology. The data reference, procedures, spillway

operation frequency water yield, reservoir operational studies,
and summary of precipitation amount and intensity.

(8) Hydraulic design. A summary of the hydraulic shape and

proportioning selected. Include channel stability and sediment
transport considerations.

(9) Foundations and/or embankment design. A summary of data,

site conditions, assumptions, treatments selected, and design
analyses used:

(i) To make seepage analyses and design control measures.

(ii) To make stability analyses and determine material

quality and quantity.

(iii) To make foundation design analyses.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

511-10
 SUBPART B - DOCUMENTATION

(iv) To permit planning instrumentation systems.

(10) Structural design. A summary of assumptions, loading

conditions, and design procedures.

(11) Environmental considerations. Features or practices to

provide for conservation of visual, biological, and surface and
ground water resources that may be affected by the planned
measures, both during and after construction.

(12) Construction drawings. Mention of standard detail

drawings or any use of previously prepared special drawings.

(13) Specifications. Mention of special specifications and

why they were needed. Explain special conditions or the need for
special provisions in the construction contract.

(14) Bid schedule. Consideration for selection of lump sum

or subsidiary items.

(15) Cost estimate. The considerations used that may be

affected by the season or changes in size of contract.

(16) Construction schedule. Explanation of any critical

starting, delay, or completion dates.

(17) Operation and maintenance. Explanation of conditions in

which design assumptions depend on proper O&M and significant O&M
activities are anticipated (for example, grasses in the emergency
spillway to protect against erosion during flow). Items
identified and evaluated during design that are planned for
replacement during the evaluation period are to be noted and
described.

(18) Construction review. A summary of those items,

conditions, or features encountered during construction that
require a field review by the design, geologist, soil engineer,
or other specialist to ensure that conditions anticipated during
design are verified and are consistent with the design
assumptions. Include the request for timely notification. Note
whether a preconstruction conference is needed.

(19) Authority. The name (with signature) and title of the

designer and approving officer.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 11, Oct. 1986)

511-11
 SUBPART C - INSTRUMENTATION

511.20 General.

(a) Structures, including foundations, abutments, and the

surrounding area of influence, are instrumented to facilitate
evaluation of their condition and performance during and after
construction.

(b) Instruments are installed to measure water levels or pore

pressures, earth or rock loads and pressures, settlements,
deflections or other movements, ground motions during
earthquakes, leakage rates or volumes, and other important items
relating to safety and performance.

(c) Instruments are used if it is determined that information

is needed for one or more of the following purposes:

(1) Determining safe rates of earth fill placement.

(2) Determining if structural strength is adequate for

backfill placement or for shoring removal.

(3) Determining safe rates or limits of excavation.

(4) Determining water levels and pressures within soil and

rock formations.

(5) Determining seepage rates or volumes.

(6) Determining safe rates of reservoir filling.

(7) Determining the instability of natural or constructed

slopes.

511.21 Scope.

The use of instrumentation is to be considered for all Class

(c) dams over 30 feet in height and any dam that has over 600
acre-feet of storage. Earth dams or other structures with unique
or complex foundations, abutment problems, or uncertain soil
conditions are to be considered for performance monitoring with
instruments.

511.22 Need for reliable instruments.

Many types of instruments are commercially manufactured or can

be assembled to perform the measurements needed. Designs are to
include only those instruments proven to be reliable and
serviceable. If SCS lacks experience in the use of an
instrument, it is necessary to check with other users to
determine its reliability.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

511-13
 PART 511 - DESIGN
511.23 Use of instrumentation.

(a) The decision on whether to monitor, with instruments

depends on:

(1) Reliability and completeness of the investigation

information;

(2) Whether soil and rock conditions or criteria used in

analyses are sufficiently conservative; and

(3) The consequences of misjudging these items.

(b) In the design folder, document the process by which the

decision to instrument or not to instrument was made and the
rationale for that decision.

(c) Instrumentation is to be used in all situations in which

the effects of treatment have any degree of uncertainty that
would result in unsafe conditions or an inadequate structure.
All safety conditions including safety to the construction force,
are to be considered. The design is to include the details and
specifications for the instruments and their installation.

(d) For earth structure, the design analyses are to determine

the magnitude of water pressure, physical movement, soil
pressure, or other measurable items where potentially unstable or
undesirable conditions exist. This information is to be included
in the design report and used in the development of a plan for
reading the instruments.

511.24 Instrumentation plans.

(a) Instrumentation designs are to include a plan that

describes the purpose, the layout and location, type of
instruments to be used, and limits of loading, pressures,
movement, or volumes for satisfactory structure performance. The
plan is to include installation details and sequence.
Instructions are to be included that indicate the timing and
frequency of reading and recording both during and after
construction. Special attention is to be given to the critical
periods in the life of the structure such as during the first
filling, any rapid raising or lowering of water, and after an
earthquake or other disturbance. The plan is to be a part of the
design documentation and is to have the same review and approval
as the other design items.

(b) As the instruments are installed and reading procedures

are started, the instrumentation plan is to be adjusted to
include procedures for data reporting and reduction or plotting.
Forms for recording data may be developed. Individuals
responsible for interpreting the results are to be specified.
Emergency procedures are to be developed that indicate those
individuals to be notified when critical readings are approached
and steps to be taken if necessary.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

511-14
 SUBPART C - INSTRUMENTATION

(c) When the project is completed and the structure is in

operation, the plan may need to be supplemented for use by new
personnel who will read and evaluate the instruments or for the
different operating personnel and conditions. The plan should
also include the location and method of data storage.

511.25 Instrumentation monitoring and reporting.

(a) The state conservationist is to provide assistance to

ensure that the needed monitoring is performed, recorded, and
reported. This can be made a part of the operation and
maintenance agreement.

(b) An annual report of the monitoring is to be made to the

state conservation engineer until monitoring is terminated. The
head of the TSC engineering staff is to receive a copy of this
report. The report is to be a summary to update the
instrumentation plan.

(c) The monitoring program may be terminated on completion of

the intended purpose with mutual consent of the state
conservation engineer and the head of the TSC engineering staff
for co-approved jobs. A completion report is to be prepared.

(d) A summary of the site condition and structure performance

exhibited by the instrumentation readings is to be made on
termination of the monitoring program. This summary is to
include an appropriate graphical array of the readings and
interpretations or conclusions regarding the performance.
Additional conclusions and recommendations for improvement may be
made regarding the instrument's location, performance, and
installation.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

511-15
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

SUBPART A - INTRODUCTION

512.00 General.

Installation of conservation practices and project structures

in accordance with approved drawings and specifications are
essential if the practice is to serve its intended purpose and
expected service life with normal operation and maintenance.
NRCS has standardized construction practices and procedures to
ensure that engineering conservation practices and project
structures are installed according to design. These procedures
provide uniformity in NRCS activities and result in common
understanding between all parties involved with the design and
installation of an engineering practice. Quality assurance
activities are an important part of NRCS standard construction
practices.

512.01 Scope.

This policy applies to all conservation engineering practices,

structures, and systems in all NRCS programs for Engineering Job
Approval Classes I through VIII as defined in NEM Part 501.
Quality assurance activities may vary in accordance with
complexity and hazard class of the structure(s).

512.02 Definitions.

(a) Owner. For contracting purposes, the owner is defined as

the party responsible for contracting for construction. The
owner pays the contractor and accepts the completed works of
improvement. The owner may be NRCS (Federal Government
contract), a local contracting organization (project sponsor), or
a private individual or group.

(b) Engineer. The engineer is responsible for project

installation. The engineer is the project representative for the
owner and is assigned technical and contract administration
duties as outlined in the quality assurance plan (QAP) and
appointment letter issued by the contracting officer. The
engineer may be an NRCS employee, an architectural and
engineering (A&E) firm employee that is providing professional

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-1
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

services under a contract with NRCS, or an employee of the local

contracting organization or partnership agency.

(c) Government Representative. The Government

Representative (GR) is a NRCS employee who has the responsibility
to protect the Government's interest and maintain close working
relations with the Contracting Local Organization (CLO) for all
works of improvement. The GR is an engineer if NRCS has quality
assurance responsibility for a construction contract. This
appointment is not normally provided for contracts handled by
private individuals or informal groups. The NRCS administrative
officer will appoint a GR by letter for all construction
contracts that are administered by others and utilize Federal
funds.

(d) Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. The

contracting officer's technical representative (COTR) is an
engineer if procurement activity is engineering and/or
construction contract related with the primary duties to ensure
that the Government's interests are protected. For construction
contracts administered by NRCS utilizing the administrative
requirements of the Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR), an
NRCS engineer has quality assurance responsibility for
installation of the works of improvement. The NRCS contracting
officer will appoint, by letter, a COTR for A&E Contracts,
professional services contracts, and construction contracts
administered by NRCS.

(e) Construction Inspector. Duties of the construction

inspector frequently involve quality assurance testing,
engineering surveys, the daily documentation of project
activities, coordination with the contractor's quality control
personnel, and maintaining the As-Built drawings. The NRCS
contracting officer will appoint, in writing, construction
inspectors with the qualifications outlined in the quality
assurance plan.

(f) Contractor. The contractor is the individual or firm that

installs the works of improvement. The contract or agreement
with the owner may be formal as in project installations, or
informal as with an individual landowner or operator in the
installation of an engineering conservation practice. Provisions
are available for the project sponsor(s) to

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-2
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

function as a contractor under agreements that may include

division of work, performance of work, or force account.

512.03 Value Engineering.

(a) Value engineering is a formal technique by which

contractors may:

(1) Voluntarily suggest alternatives to the design that may

be more economical or less costly to install and from which both
the owner and contractor would benefit.

(2) Be required to identify and submit to the Government

methods for performing work more economically. The FAR, Part 48,
Value Engineering, provides the terms and conditions for Value
Engineering Change Proposal (VECP). Consideration of any VECP
must include the comparison of future costs of operation and
maintenance and other costs that may be affected as a result of
the change.

(b) Each state will establish internal guidelines for

processing VECP’s and procedures for funding the contractor’s
share of the collateral savings.

(c) Changes for conservation engineering practices proposed by

the contractor should be handled similar to a VECP. When the
change is technically acceptable (meets NRCS standards and
specifications), the decision to accept the change remains with
the landowner/operator. NRCS will provide adequate review of the
proposal and provide the decisionmaker with the necessary
information to support the acceptance or rejection of the
proposal. Any proposed change to an engineering structure must
be approved by a person with the appropriate job approval
authority.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-3
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(NOTE: Sections 512.04 through 512.09 are reserved.)

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-4
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

SUBPART B - PRECONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

512.10 Selection of the contractor.

The submitted bid or proposal, which must comply with the

instructions outlined in the solicitation package, must be
complete in order to determine contractor responsibility. The
contractor is responsible for understanding and being familiar
with the procurement requirements, project location, material
requirements, construction requirements, special provisions,
construction site access, restrictions and limitations, local
rules and regulations, and be familiar with the type of work.

512.11 Site showing.

(a) Where formal contracts or agreements are utilized to

install conservation engineering practices or project elements,
the following procedures shall be followed:

(1) Potential bidders will be shown the project site so

that they may inspect the area, determine the scope of the work,
and receive answers to questions that may occur. Stakes and/or
flagging shall be used to identify the major items of work and
their relationship to other elements of the proposed project.

(2) The engineer and contracting officer, or their

authorized representative(s), are to show the site to interested
contractors and identify physical elements on or near the site
that will contribute to the submission of a responsible bid. The
following items shall be identified and discussed, as
appropriate: access roads, right-of-way and construction limits
provided by the owner, clearing limits, location of known
utilities, proposed structure(s) location, existing structures to
be removed, proposed borrow and waste areas, location of geologic
test holes/pits, the contractor’s responsibility for pollution
control, construction safety, and other important features.

(3) The person conducting the site showing is not to

express an opinion as to the difficulty or the ease of performing
work elements. A site showing is intended to introduce potential
bidders to the procurement contract documents and to provide
responses to questions concerning those documents that may arise.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-5
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

It is critical that all responses to questions that may affect a

contractor's evaluation and potential bid proposal be shared with
all solicitation package holders. This may require a written
follow-up or an amendment to the solicitation as required by the
Agriculture Acquisition Regulations (AGAR) 452.237-71.

(4) The site showing activities will be documented and

shall include a list of attendees, outline of the site showing
presentation, questions raised together with the responses, and
any item or occurrence that could enter into a contractor's
evaluation of the extent of work being solicited by the
procurement activity. All attendees shall provide their name,
company, mailing address, telephone number, and FAX number on a
sign-in register. The job diary, or other permanent record for
the project, shall be utilized to record basic information and to
reference the site showing minutes.

(b) Where individual landowners/operators hire a contractor,

site showings for engineering conservation practices may be less
formal than following the guidelines listed in items (1) through
(4) above. The landowner/operator may request that an NRCS
employee be present to assist with the site showing. A job
diary, assistance notes (SCS-CPA-6), or other permanent record
shall be utilized to document construction activities. A job
diary shall be used for job approval Class V - VIII engineering
practices.

512.12 Evaluation of bidder(s).

Prior to awarding a construction contract, an evaluation of

equipment and credentials must be conducted and responsibility of
the bidder evaluated. Responsibility is defined as having the
capacity, credit, integrity, tenacity, and perseverance to
perform the job as specified. If a landowner/operator is
installing a conservation practice, he/she will make the
responsibility determination and negotiate the contract. NRCS
may provide technical assistance (TA) to the landowner/operator
in evaluation of bidders.

(a) Determining the lowest responsible bidder. Government

agencies must award contracts to the lowest responsible bidder.
Project sponsors having contract administration duties have

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-6
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

similar responsibilities. Individual landowners have similar

interests to ensure quality and timely installation of their
works of improvement at a reasonable cost. The potential for
timely installation shall be determined by reviewing the
contractor‘s present workload and commitments. Responsibility
can usually be determined by interviewing owners and individuals
who have a first-hand knowledge of the contractor’s past
performance, reviewing the contractor‘s plant and equipment, and
by performing a credit check and reviewing the contractor’s
financial statement. A critical element in determining
responsibleness is the history of performance and authority of
the contractor’s project superintendent. Proposed
subcontractors, especially those having a unique specialty, shall
be evaluated to the same extent as the prime contractor. All
information collected to determine responsiveness is to remain
confidential with only those involved with awarding the contract
having a need to know.

(b) Documentation. Information collected to determine if a

potential contractor is responsible will be documented by the
contracting officer to support the award of a contract.

512.13 Preconstruction conference.

(a) For Federal contracts under the Federal Acquisition

Regulations, this meeting is titled the Post Award Conference.
It is usually the first meeting between the owner and contractor
following the issuance of the contract. The conference will be
used to develop a positive working relationship and generate a
discussion that centers on the procedures the contractor plans to
implement to meet the terms and conditions of the contract.
Individuals representing the contractor and subcontractor(s), the
owner (sponsors), major suppliers, and others who will be working
together in the execution of the contract should be present. The
authorities and responsibilities of these individuals shall be
jointly understood. A detailed review of the drawings,
construction and material specifications, and contract provisions
shall be a priority of this meeting. The contractor’s
construction schedule will be reviewed and any questions resolved
prior to final approval by the contracting officer. Status of
all land rights, permits, easements, and related items should be
reviewed and any restrictions or limitations that could affect

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-7
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

performance by the contractor needs to be reviewed. Other items

that shall be discussed will include: contractor‘s safety plan,
emergency response plan, health and safety meetings schedule,
schedule for partnering meetings, sanitary facilities,
communication system, construction office space and equipment
provided to the owner by the contractor, project layout and
staking, public health and safety, utilities in the area
including those that will provide service during construction,
source of construction materials, contractor’s quality control
plan, removal of water and dewatering plan(s), weather clauses
and time extensions, holidays that will be honored during the
performance time provided, and any other item that could have an
impact on the contractor’s performance.

(b) The preconstruction conference minutes are to be

recorded. Minutes are to be reviewed, finalized, and shared with
all participants. Any questions and answers and any
interpretations of contract documents provided at the pre-
construction conference will be included in the minutes. Any
questions that could not be answered by the contract documents,
(where interpretation is provided), will be addressed and
included in the minutes. A contract modification may be
necessary to provide clarity or to provide a summary of a
response that could affect the extent of the work or final cost
of the contract. All basic information of the conference will be
recorded in the Job Diary or other permanent record.

(c) Reviewing the extent of the work required of the

contractor for the installation of engineering conservation
practices to be installed for an individual landowner/operator is
equally important. Documentation, to the extent listed
previously, may not be required unless it is requested by one of
the parties associated with the installation to support decisions
made and provide necessary clarity. The use of the job dairy,
SCS-CPA-6, or other permanent record and/or sharing in writing of
agreed-to action items will usually suffice to document
installation activities and associated items. The owner shall be
involved in any decision that could affect the practice
installation and/or final cost. Owner/operator involvement is
particularly important for any changes requested by a contractor
in which installation is being accomplished without a formal
contract.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-8
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

512.14 Partnering.

(a) Partnering is an attitude that leads to resolution of

issues, at the lowest possible level of the parties to the
contract, with the greatest amount of material benefits possible.
It is a way of doing business with a contractor, cooperator, or
other customer(s) that recognizes that they have common goals
which can be achieved through cooperation and open
communications. The philosophy of partnering is strongly
encouraged in the daily activities of providing technical
assistance. A primary benefit of partnering is the reduction of
the threat of resolving issues through the legal process which is
costly to all parties involved.

(b) The partnership for construction contracts may be

established through a facilitated process, normally consisting of
organized workshops that bring the participants together. The
costs to conduct a partnering workshop shall be shared among all
the participants to the contract. The participants shall
represent all levels of each organization involved with the
construction contract. A Partnering Charter or similar agreement
should be developed and shared with all participants.

(c) When issues are not resolved to the satisfaction of those

directly involved at one level, the issue is elevated to the next
management level for resolution.

(d) Federal agencies, together with construction industry

organizations, provide guidelines to the partnering process.
Procedures to implement partnering vary significantly.
Implementation of the partnering concept will vary with each
contract. All individuals associated with a potential partnering
arrangement need to be flexible.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-9
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(NOTE: Sections 512.15 through 512.19 are reserved.)

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-10
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

SUBPART C - EVALUATION OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

512.20 General.

(a) Quality requirements for construction materials are

contained in the National Handbook of Conservation Practices
(NHCP) and the National Engineering Handbook (NEH). Many of
these specifications and standards refer to standards and
specifications used in industry and include: American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM), American Water Works
Association (AWWA), USA Standards Institute, American Concrete
Institute (ACI), Federal Supply Service (FSS), product standards
published by the National Bureau of Standards (NBS), and others.
These referenced standards and specifications set forth
requirements for material performance, material testing, quality
control, and quality assurance.

(b) To ensure that construction materials meet job

requirements, an evaluation of material quality in relation to
applicable industry standards and/or specifications must be made.
The nature, time, and place of this evaluation depends on the
type of material, the specifications, the kind of construction,
and other factors that could affect the public’s health and
safety.

512.21 Evaluation procedures.

(a) Material quality will be evaluated by at least one of

the following procedures:

(1) Laboratory testing by NRCS, by a consulting firm, or

commercial laboratory under contract with NRCS; laboratory under
contract with a sponsor or owner, or by another Government
agency. (Example: concrete compressive strength testing)

(2) Testing by a consulting firm or commercial laboratory

employed by the manufacturer under approved conditions and
independent arrangements. (Example: structural steel)

(3) Certification in writing by the manufacturer that the

material complies with the applicable specifications. Test

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-11
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

results showing compliance may be required and attached to the

certification. (Example: steel reinforcement)

(4) Markings on material that identify the manufacturer

and indicate compliance with the appropriate specification(s).
Laboratory tests and current test reports are to be provided on
request. (Example: plastic pipe)

(5) Examination and/or testing at the job site. (Example:

drainfill)

(6) Prequalification of materials. (Example: water

control valves)

(b) Used materials are acceptable if they are suitable for

the proposed work, the expected service life is equal to or
greater than the projected overall structure or system’s designed
service life, they are structurally adequate, and environmentally
acceptable. State conservation engineers are to establish
guidelines for accepting and incorporating used materials in
systems for which NRCS provides technical or financial
assistance. The owner must pay special attention to used items
during operation and maintenance activities.

(c) New products that have not been used previously for
conservation practice application must be evaluated and approved
for use before being specified. Trial use of new products must
be under the approval of the state conservation engineer and
shall be supported by industry or applicable standards,
specifications, evaluation data and/or reports.

(d) State conservation engineers are to designate materials

that require certification and/or testing based on the quantity
of the items used, the life of the item in relation to the life
of structures in which it is used, the cost of the types of
structures in which it is used, the difficulty of replacement,
and the consequences of failure of the structures in which it is
used. Acceptance of a material on the basis of the certification
is permissible only if the material meets all of the following
requirements:

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-12
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(1) Its conformance to the specification requirements

cannot be verified on site by visual inspection. (Example: Rock
for riprap, the material durability)

(2) It is a commercially available or manufactured item or

product, the quality of which is customarily controlled by the
manufacturer within specified limits. (Example: Metal slide
gates)

(3) Its quality is specified by reference to standards

and/or specifications normally used in the construction industry
such as ASTM, AWWA, ACI, etc. Such materials include: portland
cement, air-entraining agents, set retarders and plasticizers,
sealing compounds for joints, steel reinforcement, curing
compounds, preformed expansion joint filler, and waterstops for
concrete structures; asphaltic cements; concrete, corrugated
steel, aluminum, ductile iron, steel, copper, and plastic pipe
and fittings; rubber gaskets; preservative treatments for wood
products; structural metals; steel piles; geotextiles; etc.

512.22 Waivers of material certifications.

(a) NRCS contracts require certification for all materials

incorporated in the works of improvement unless specifically
waived.

(b) Certification may be waived under the following

conditions:

(1) The material is tested by NRCS.

(2) The material serves a minor role of a project that

has no potential detrimental public health and safety impacts.

(i) Quantities are considered to be small in relation

to the total structure;

(ii) The material is a commercially available,

manufactured, or fabricated item and conformance with
specifications can be reasonably determined by field examination;
and,

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-13
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(iii) The item's location within or on the structure or

system allows for easy maintenance and/or replacement.

512.23 Prequalification of materials.

(a) Prequalification is the evaluation and determination of

materials that may be used without further certifications.
Prequalification eliminates the need for requesting and
furnishing individual certifications and test results for each
project or contract.

(1) Prequalification is an acceptable procedure to support

quality installation of materials used in NRCS construction when
items are manufactured under close quality control and
consistently meet the applicable specifications. Several items
frequently identified for use in NRCS construction include:
cement; reinforcement steel; structural metals; concrete, metal,
and plastic pipe; fittings and gaskets for pipe; waterstop,
preformed expansion joint filler, sealing compound, air-
entrainment agents, curing compound, set retarding, and water
reducing agents for concrete; metal coatings; wood preservatives;
water control gates and valves; pipeline protection valves;
geotextiles and geomembranes; etc. Materials must be clearly
marked by the manufacturer as to the size, grade, ASTM Standard,
manufacturer, and other essential characteristics that further
identifies the product and/or material. Quality assurance
support for material quality can be provided by photographic
documentation showing the manufacturer's label on the product or
item.

(2) Local natural materials for which prequalification is

a suitable procedure include aggregate for drainfill or concrete,
and rock for riprap or rockfill. Prequalification of material is
to support quality and should not be construed as a waiver from
testing to provide support to document material gradation. For
small projects and those in which adequate time is not available
to complete a test, the use of prequalified materials is a viable
alternative to insure material quality.

(b) Prequalified materials may be used in NRCS construction

by referring to the certification and/or test data file. When a
prequalified item or product is used, its use must be recorded on

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-14
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

the As-Built drawings, recorded in the job diary, or documented

by other suitable methods as determined by the state conservation
engineer.

(c) States have authority to prepare and maintain a list of

materials approved for prequalification when the quantity of
materials being used economically justifies its preparation.

(1) Each state conservation engineer is responsible for

evaluation and prequalification of materials manufactured in
their state and sharing the data with adjacent state conservation
engineers.

(i) The state conservation engineer is to initiate the

prequalification procedure. Methods that may be considered are:
request written certification and supporting test results from
the manufacturer; conduct material testing of the item or
product; obtain material certification data from other Government
agencies or organizations.

(ii) Each state conservation engineer is to evaluate

certification and test data when received to determine if the
material or product meets the applicable specification. The
state conservation engineer will determine if additional
inspection and testing is necessary.

(iii) When the state conservation engineer has

determined that the product and/or material meets the
requirements for prequalification, it is included on the state
list for prequalified materials. The list shall include the name
of the product, the manufacturer, the applicable specifications,
and any other identifying information, as appropriate.

(2) The coordination and sharing of prequalified material

lists between states shall be as determined by the appropriate
state conservation engineers. It is strongly encouraged that
prequalified lists be shared so time to develop proper support to
prequalify a product or material will be minimized.

(d) Many factors affect the quality and acceptability of

manufactured products. Prequalified products and/or materials
may need to be reviewed occasionally to ensure minimum quality
requirements are current. The frequency of this review will be

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-15
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

determined by the state conservation engineer who initially

approved the material for entry on the list of prequalified
materials.

(NOTE: Sections 512.24 through 512.29 are reserved.)

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-16
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

SUBPART D - QUALITY ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES

512.30 General.

(a) For formal construction contracts, the general and

special provisions of the contract and the quality assurance plan
(QAP) outline construction inspection requirements. The
construction specifications outline the duties and
responsibilities of the contractor’s quality control program.

(b) Quality assurance activities may vary in accordance with

complexity and hazard class of the structure(s). Quality
Assurance Plans (QAP) will be prepared and utilized in accordance
with Natural Resources Conservation Service Acquisition
Regulations (NRCSAR) and the National Contracts, Grants, and
Cooperative Agreements Manual (NCGCAM). QAP will outline the
technical and administrative expertise required, identify the
individuals with that expertise, outline the frequency and timing
of technical assistance, estimate the contract completion date,
and be co-approved by all responsible supervisors, state
conservation engineer, and contracting officer.

(c) All manure (animal waste) management structures having

moderate or high environmental risk must have a quality assurance
(construction inspection) plan prepared and implemented in
accordance with Sections 512.30(e) (1) and 512.32. To determine
environmental risk, the current NRCS Form SCS-CPA-52
”Environmental Effects For Conservation Plans and Areawide
Conservation Plans” shall be completed. If the evaluation of the
Conservation Management System (CMS) on SCS-CPA-52 results in the
number of adverse effects exceeding the beneficial effects or if
any of the special environmental concerns are adverse or
positive, a QAP will be developed and implemented.

(d) National Engineering Handbook (NEH) includes procedures

for inspection of construction activities.

(e) The performance of quality assurance duties in an

efficient and economical manner requires:

(1) Providing the proper number of qualified personnel

with the knowledge, skills, and abilities (KSAs) necessary to
conduct timely and effective technical assistance as outlined in

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-17
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

the Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) for the project. Preparation

and content of the QAP is outlined in the National Contracts,
Grants, and Cooperative Agreement Manual (NCGCAM) and in Natural
Resources Conservation Service Acquisition Regulations
(NRCSAR) 4I-46.70-6.

(2) Continuous coordination with the quality control

representative of the contractor to insure NRCS quality assurance
activities are effective.

(3) Minimizing interference with the contractor's

production activities.

512.31 Definitions.

(a) Quality control - Activities performed by the contractor

to document that the work installed meets the minimum
requirements of the contract. This is a bid item for most
contracts involving project type work and requirements are
specified in NEH-20, Construction Specification 94, Contractor
Quality Control. On less formalized construction activities, the
contractor's quality control (QC) responsibilities shall be
outlined in the construction specifications or contract, where
applicable.

(b) Quality assurance - Activities performed by the owner

including: observing construction methods and procedures,
reviewing quality control testing activities of the contractor,
conducting material testing to evaluate contractor's quality
control system, and other measures to ensure compliance with the
contract provisions. The duties and responsibilities for this
activity are outlined in the quality assurance plan for the
specific project being installed.

(c) Quality Assurance Plan - This plan is a major tool in

defining NRCS quality assurance duties. The plan includes the
following quality, quantity, and timeliness requirements:
General Description of the Work, Items of Work Requiring
Inspection, Timing of Inspections, Skills Needed by Inspectors,
Number of Staff Hours, Equipment and Facilities Needed, Names and
Qualifications of Personnel, and Supervisors Statement of

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-18
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

Availability (includes state conservationist, state conservation

engineer and contracting officer for Engineering Job Approval
Class V - VIII Projects). Policy for QAP content is located in
NRCSAR 4I-46.70-6.

512.32 Quality assurance procedures.

(a) Quality assurance requires a uniform degree of

implementation. It is to be applied equally to all projects that
are similar. The extent of quality assurance testing by NRCS
and/or its agents may vary depending on the contractor’s quality
control performance. All staff members assigned to construction
contracts shall have the minimum KSAs outlined in the quality
assurance plan.

(b) To ensure that engineering conservation practices with

Engineering Job Approval Class I - IV are provided the minimum
technical assistance needed for proper installation, the
responsible line officer and the responsible technical staff
person will determine the adequacy and availability of the
technical resources required. This determination will be
evaluated and established prior to practice layout. The line
officer shall assign a staff member this responsibility and
provide adequate time to insure quality installation.

(c) Quality assurance duties assigned for Engineering Job

Class V - VIII will be outlined in the quality assurance plan for
the project and be signed by the state conservation engineer, the
contracting officer, and state conservationist. Quality
Assurance Plans will be prepared by an individual that has an
understanding of the project design and has knowledge of
individuals with the quality assurance technical skills and are
available for appointment for the project. Under no
circumstances will certification stating that work has been
accomplished in compliance with the drawings, specifications, and
other contract provisions occur without a physical review and
documentation of the work performed.

(1) Continuous inspection is required for any construction

activity the quality of which cannot be verified by intermittent
observations. Continuous inspection is also

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-19
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

required for work that cannot be readily removed and replaced if

it fails to meet the requirements of the contract. Construction
activities related to this type of situation may include:
foundation, core trench, and structure excavation; placing and
compacting earthfill, drainfill, and rock riprap; pipe
installation; driving piles; mixing and placing concrete,
concrete form removal, dental concrete grout, and pneumatically
applied mortar; repairing concrete; correcting over excavations;
fertilizing and seeding disturbed areas; contractor quality
control testing; etc.

(2) Intermittent or periodic inspections may be adequate

for certain phases of project activities depending on the
complexity of the installation and the potential impacts upon the
health and welfare of the public. Intermittent observation and
its documentation may apply to the following types of
construction activities: dewatering and removal of water;
clearing, and clearing and grubbing; vegetation stripping;
structure removal; excavations when the resulting finished grade
will remain exposed; forming and placing of reinforcing steel for
concrete structures; applying pigmented concrete curing compound;
fabrication of project elements; installation of items that can
be observed following project completion; painting; sodding and
mulching; installing fences; and, other similar activities.

512.33 Inspection of materials.

Materials used in construction must be inspected before they

are installed as part of the completed works of improvement.
This requirement also includes material that is prequalified.
Documentation of the material certification is to be accomplished
by listing the associated information in the project job diary or
recording data on the As-Built drawings.

(a) Quality assurance (formal construction inspection) at the

factory and/or place of fabrication may be required for special
items or specialty products. NRCS procurement procedures usually
do not warrant having inspectors at factories, locations of
fabrication, or other sources of supply. The extent of quality
assurance required will be determined by the State Conservation
Engineer and shall be compatible with the contractor’s quality
control responsibilities.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-20
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(b) Quality assurance at or near the project site is normally

required for all materials and work for which compliance with
specification requirements must be verified by examination and/or
testing. Quality assurance may include:

(1) Field verification of the material certification will

be made including the size, dimensions, and other measurements
required by the drawings and approved shop drawings. Information
provided with the item needs to be verified and documented which
may include reference to ASTM, ACI, AWWA, and/or other standards
and specifications.

(2) Sampling and testing of materials that are provided by

local suppliers.

(c) Some materials must be inspected at the work site. They

shall be listed in the quality assurance plan for the project and
may include:

(1) Earth fill materials, rock riprap, drainfill, filter

materials, and bedding materials, aggregates for concrete, and
other similar items.

(2) Materials manufactured and delivered to the site which

could include: concrete, mortar, asphalt concrete, concrete for
roller compacted concrete structures, and other similar type
materials.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-21
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(NOTE: Sections 512.34 through 512.39 are reserved.)

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-22
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

SUBPART E - EQUIPMENT, RECORDS, AND COORDINATION

512.40 Engineering equipment.

(a) Engineering equipment must be available for assigned

project and field staff to provide necessary quality assurance
duties in accordance with the quality assurance plan. Each state
conservation engineer shall develop a list that outlines the
minimum equipment that will be permanently assigned to each field
or technical service office. This list will be utilized to
develop and maintain a statewide inventory of engineering
equipment. Procedures shall be established to ensure that all
engineering equipment is periodically inspected for accuracy and
serviceability (See PART 544, EQUIPMENT).

(b) Specialty equipment will be assigned to qualified

individuals that have the necessary skills and approvals to
operate and maintain the equipment. This requirement applies to
but is not limited to nuclear gauges that are used to determine
soil moisture for irrigation associated technical assistance and
soil moisture/density of earth fills normally used for project
contracts. Qualifications to become a responsible user of
nuclear gauges are as required by the Nuclear Regulatory
Commission under an agreement with the U. S. Department of
Agriculture, Agriculture Research Service.

512.41 Records.

(a) Job Diary. Where formal contracts or agreements are

utilized to install conservation engineering practices or project
elements and for all Engineering Job Class V - VIII practices, a
job diary shall be maintained to document the daily activities of
the project. The state conservation engineer (SCE), contracting
officer (CO), government representative (GR), or contracting
officer’s technical representative (COTR), individually or
jointly, will determine which quality assurance (QA) personnel
will maintain a job diary to record the progress and other
elements of the project. It may be beneficial on projects where
construction activity is occurring at more than one location to
have more than one diary to ensure important information is
recorded. The job diary serves as a source of factual data

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-23
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

related to the contractor’s performance in both quantity and

quality. The National Contracts, Grants, and Cooperative
Agreement Manual (NCGAM) section 120-517 provides guidance on
proper use of the job diary for project type work. On less
formalized construction activities, the level of detail to be
recorded in the job diary shall be commensurate with the
complexity of the work and potential impacts upon public health
and safety.

(b) Construction contracts that include Construction

Specification 94, Contractor Quality Control, will include
specific testing and documentation and other requirements for the
contractor. Coordination of the quality control and quality
assurance activities will minimize duplication of effort to
support compliance with contract requirements.

(c) Construction documentation will include the following:

(1) All quality control and quality assurance testing.

(2) A record keeping system that identifies the status of

construction activities that meet and those that fail to meet the
minimum contract requirements. The use of NRCS Job Diary
provides the tools to record and document these daily activities.

(3) Photographic documentation of significant construction

activities which may include: site conditions that may affect
contractor performance, deficiencies, safety and health
conditions, water quality protection system and its
effectiveness, etc. Each picture and/or slide will be properly
identified with the following minimum data: project name, subject
of the picture, contractor, contract number, date, and
photographer’s name. Where necessary to provide a reference to
scale, an item of known size shall be included in the photograph
An index of all photographic documentation will be kept current.

(4) Video recording provides additional methods to

document construction activities. Complete audio description
should be included on the video to assist in communicating the
intended message. The initial part of the recordings shall
include the project name, contract number, subject being
recorded, date, and the camera operator and others assisting with
the video recording.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-24
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(5) The Quality Assurance Plan that outlines the quality

assurance duties and construction documentation needed.

(6) Documentation required by procurement, safety, health,

personnel, financial regulations, local laws and regulations,
permitting requirements, etc.

(d) For Engineering Job Class I - IV conservation practices,

the state conservation engineer is required to outline the extent
of testing and record keeping required to support quality
installation. The use of SCS-CPA-6 (Conservation Planning and
Implementation Notes) is a viable option.

512.42 Coordination between disciplines.

(a) The design report contains technical information from

several specialists: design engineer, geologist, soils engineer,
landscape architect, and others who may recommend specific tests
or examinations during construction. An individual with the
appropriate level of approval must be responsible to ensure that
items of the design report are addressed and that all recommended
testing and examinations are properly completed as outlined in
the QAP.

(b) The engineer and/or technician responsible for on-site

quality assurance must detect variations from the design. The
project design report shall be reviewed and understood by QC and
QA personnel, and be available at the construction site. When
differences exist, quality assurance personnel or other persons
shall not alter or make design related changes in the work under
the contract without review and concurrence of an individual with
appropriate job approval authority. The appropriate
discipline(s) necessary to review potential variations shall be
contacted as early as possible to minimize delays for the
contractor.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-25
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(NOTE: Sections 512.43 through 512.49 are reserved.)

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-26
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

SUBPART F - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

512.50 General.

As-Built drawings are developed to document the final

installation features of the structure and the final physical
condition of the site. These drawings are important in providing
critical information for those physical features of the structure
that are not visible following completion of the project
installation. The As-Built drawings are reviewed as needed to:
evaluate the design; determine proper operation and maintenance
items; provide support for any legal matters; provide support to
evaluate problems if the structure fails to perform as designed;
and facilitate efficient maintenance or modification.

512.51 Applicability.

(a) As-Built drawings must be prepared for all major (Class

V - VIII) structural works of improvement and for all inventory
size dams. As-Built documentation of changes during construction
is also required, when: local organization provides the quality
assurance duties; quality assurance activities are accomplished
by a professional services contract; etc. As-Built drawings must
also be prepared for structures:

(1) Built under formal contract by NRCS or a cooperating

local sponsor;

(2) When another agency of Government requires the filing

of As-Built plans (Example - statewide utility notification
system for buried pipes);

(3) When the final installed plans are required to

properly locate structural features and perform operation and
maintenance; (Example - Pipeline system where the As-Built shows
the final location of valves, drains and pipe sizes.); or

(4) When future plans could include additions and/or

adaptations to the present structure (Example - Plans include the
extension of the pipeline system).

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-27
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(b) As-Built drawings for structures in the Engineering Job

Class I - IV will be prepared as determined by the State
Conservation Engineer.

512.52 Documentation.

(a) Recording changes.

(1) All changes during construction must be recorded on

the drawings to indicate As-Built conditions. The state
conservation engineer shall outline procedures for supplementing
the design report to include analysis and supporting data. If a
structure is altered at any time following initial completion,
the As-Built plans must be retrieved and revised to indicate the
alterations. After the drawings have been revised to include the
additions and modifications, updated As-Built plans will be re-
distributed in the same manner as the original As-Built plans.

(2) A complete set of full-size construction drawings

must be maintained at the work site to make timely updates as the
work progresses. Changes shall be recorded on these drawings in
a manner that As-Built information is obvious. The noted changes
must be neat and legible and of quality equal to the original
drawings because the drawings may be camera copied and reduced in
size. If changes are extensive, they may be re-drafted on new
standard drawing sheets with adequate detail and cross referenced
to define the changes that were incorporated. The original
corrected drawings and any new drawings must be included as the
revised As-Built drawings for the competed works of improvement.
As-Built CAD drawings should clearly show both the original
design and As-Built information using varying line weight, color,
shading, hatching, dimensioning, notes, and separate layers as
needed.

(3) Determination of when a change is significant, and

when it should be recorded, depends on its effect on the
functioning of the structure, whether it is visible and/or
accessible after construction is complete, and if any planned
future changes involve adaptation to the present structure that
was affected by the change. All significant changes shall be
described in writing by concise notes or by updating the

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-28
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

drawings. Notes describing the changes will be recorded on all

sheets of the drawings where changes occurred.

(4) Structural and/or dimensional changes made in a

conduit, drainage system, cutoff trench, foundation preparation,
embankment zoning, geotextile material, dental concrete, outlet
pipes, or any structural element that will not be visible
following completion of the works of improvement must be
illustrated in detail to provide complete, legible, and a true
and final record of the As-Built conditions.

(5) Changes during construction that could affect the

storage volume of a reservoir or structure are to be recorded as
an As-Built condition. These changes could include: more or less
borrow material being removed from the reservoir basin,
deposition of waste material within the basin, and a significant
change in a structure (like a roadway) within the storage area.

(b) Geology.

(1) Because pre-construction borrow and foundation

investigations rely on a sampling and evaluation process to
establish the geologic conditions at the proposed structure(s)
site, excavations during construction may expose conditions not
previously observed and reported. Actual conditions encountered
shall be appropriately documented, with particular emphasis on
those that vary significantly from information presented in the
design reports. Significant variations may require a
reevaluation by the original designer.

(2) All significant differences in the geologic

information identified during construction shall be reported to
the approving engineer on the As-Built drawings and geologic maps
and sections to supplement the geologic report of the project
and/or structure. Significant differences include structural or
stratigraphy discontinuities in the geologic materials (any type
of soil or rock) at the site, location of solution cavities and
voids, ground water conditions, and any other geologic related
condition that can adversely affect the engineering performance
of the structure.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-29
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(c) Labelinq. Each sheet of the As-Built drawings must be

clearly identified as "AS-BUILT." The title sheet of the
drawings shall list the contractor, contract number, construction
completion date, name(s) of construction inspectors and final
amount of the contract. The title sheet will also contain the GR
or COTR name and signature to certify that all work under the
contract was installed in accordance with the As-Built drawings
and specifications, and that the As-Built drawings are a true and
correct record.

(d) Checkinq. Following construction, the As-Built plans

must be checked by the individual certifying completion in
accordance with the contract provisions. The certifying official
shall initial each sheet of the drawings together with signing
the title sheet. The As-Built drawings must be submitted to the
NRCS office that has the technical responsibility for the project
work and be available for future reference.

(e) Reproduction. Each state office (including the Pacific

Basin Area and Caribbean Basin Area) is responsible for the size
reduction and reproduction of the As-Built drawings for project
type work. Final size of the reproduced As-Built plans should be
11 to 12 inches by 15 to 18 inches. A reproducible copy will be
properly filed at the state office and be available for
developing additional copies in the future. Copies of the As-
Built drawings shall have the following distribution:

(1) A negative or print copy for extended Federal

Archives and Records Center (FARC) storage. (See GM Title 120,
Section 408.63) For those projects where the National Archives
has designated the records as PERMANENT, a negative copy must be
provided.

(2) Each sponsor or owner of the project that requests a

copy. The sponsor that has operation and maintenance
responsibility shall receive and retain a copy for reference.
Operation and maintenance information, including shop drawings
for equipment that was installed for the project and/or practice,
shall be included with the As-Built drawings for the
sponsors/owner/operator.

(3) A copy shall remain on file at the local USDA Field

Office.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-30
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(4) A copy of the As-Built construction drawings and

specifications shall be provided to the sponsors f o r project
work. This includes updated As-Built drawings for projects where
additional work was performed. A copy of As-Built drawings
prepared for conservation engineering practices, when required
under Section NEM Part 512.51, shall be provided to the
landowner/operator following completion and acceptance of the
work.

(5) CADD generated drawings with As-Built updates may be

used to reproduce drawings for sponsors/owners. The CADD
electronic file shall be clearly identified and made a part of
the file documentation.

(6) State and/or local regulatory authorities which issue

permits, or as required by regulations.

512.53 Disposition.

For the disposition of As-Built files for structures installed

as part of a total project, see General Manual Title 120, Section
408.63 under File Code 210-12-11.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-31
 PART 512 – CONSTRUCTION

(Note: Sections 512.54 through 512.59 are reserved)

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

512-32
 PART 513 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

(Reserved.)

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

513-1
 SUBCHAPTER C - APPLICATIONS

PART 520 - SOIL AND WATER RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT

SUBPART A – EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

520.00 General.
520.01 Minimizing erosion and pollution during construction.

SUBPART B - FLOOD PLAIN MANAGEMENT

520.10 General.
520.11 Scope.
520.12 Description.
520.13 Types of measures.
520.14 Risk to life and property.

SUBPART C - DAMS

520.20 General.
520.21 Definition and classes.
520.22 Design criteria.
520.23 Classification.
520.24 Special considerations.
520.25 Clearing reservoirs.
520.26 Independent reviews for dam safety.
520.27 Emergency action plans--class (c) dams.
520.28 Potential impact area--class (a) dams of inventory size
and all class (b) dams.

SUBPART D - OPEN CHANNELS

520.30 General.
520.31 Definition.
520.32 Design criteria.
520.33 Special considerations.

PART 521 - POLLUTION ABATEMENT AND WATER QUALITY IMPROVEMENT

521.00 General.
521.01 Pollution abatement in conservation operations.
521.02 Pollution abatement in project activities.
521.03 Effect of NRCS activities on water quality.
521.04 Effect of water quality on NRCS activities.

(210-V NEM, Second Edition, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

i
 PART 522 - SNOW SURVEY AND WATER SUPPLY FORECASTING

SUBPART A – RESERVOIR OPERATIONS GUIDE FOR SNOWMELT

522.00 General.
522.01 Authority and request for assistance.
522.02 Responsibility.
522.03 NRCS technical review.
522.04 Reservoir operation guide review.
522.05 Reservoir operation guide contents.

SUBPART B - (RESERVED)

PART 523 - IRRIGATION

523.00 General.
523.01 Technical assistance.
523.02 Irrigation guides.
523.03 Assistance on irrigation projects.
523.04 Water management for salinity control
523.05 Irrigation training.

PART 524 - DRAINAGE d

(Reserved)

PART 525 - RESTORATION

(Reserved)

PART 526 - STORMWATER MANAGEMENT

(Reserved)

PART 527 - WETLANDS

(Reserved)

PART 528 - DAMS

(Reserved)

PART 529 - AIR QUALITY

(Reserved)

(210-V NEM, Second Edition, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

ii
 SUBCHAPTER C - APPLICATIONS

PART 520 – SOIL AND WATER RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT

SUBPART A - EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

520.00 General.

(a) Effective erosion and sediment control requires a

comprehensive system of engineering and cultural practices
applied to the land for the specific purpose of controlling
erosion and preventing excessive sediment accumulation. Federal
and State laws, regulations, and executive orders have emphasized
the need to conserve natural resources and to improve the quality
of the environment. Erosion and sediment control systems address
this need.

(b) Erosion occurs in many areas other than cropland.

Construction sites, parks, playgrounds, roads, and urban areas
are major sources of erosion. SCS is often asked for assistance
in the planning, design, and construction of erosion and sediment
control systems.

520.0l Minimizing erosion and pollution during construction.

(a) SCS is to minimize erosion and pollution in construction

operations carried out under all programs. The need for
pollution abatement must be determined for each site by
evaluating the pollution hazard and its relation to the pollution
tolerance or standard for the area in question. A review of
State and local standards established as a result of the Water
Pollution Control Act (as amended) should be used in determining
the control necessary for special sites.

(b) Pollution control measures are to be included as a part of

all construction carried out by SCS through formal contract or
force account procedures.

(c) Pollution control measures are to be included as a part of

all construction carried out by local organizations, through
formal contract or otherwise, with SCS providing the engineering
design, installation services, or both.

(d) All construction that is carried out by local

organizations, either with their own engineering organization or
with engineering consultants retained by them with SCS financial
assistance, must comply with the intent of this policy but not
necessarily with the specific details.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

520-1
 PART 520 – SOIL AND WATER RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT

(e) In addition, engineering done by SCS for individuals and

groups is to include satisfactory control measures.

(f) Because the measures required to control erosion and

pollution may be unique to each site, new national guide
specifications on such measures will not be established. States
are to develop plans and specifications for the specific measures
that are required for individual structures or sites or by using
appropriate National Guide Specifications (NEH-20) or the
National Handbook of Conservation Practices.

(g) Field surveys and site investigations are to include the

information required to properly plan and design the measures
needed to provide an acceptable degree of pollution erosion
control for a site. Requirements for vegetative control measures
are to be included along with structural measures.

(h) Requirements for erosion and pollution control measures

must be clearly outlined in construction contracts. In many
contracts these requirements can be included in the items of work
and construction details section.

(i) Control measures included in construction contracts are to

be discussed with the contractors at the prebid site showing and
at the preconstruction conference.

(j) If special pollution problems arise during construction or

if special measures not in the contract are needed, they are to
be brought to the attention of the contracting officer for
contract modification or other appropriate action.

(k) In preparing plans and specifications for structures or

projects at locations where pollution tolerances may be exceeded,
consider that:

(1) The area and duration of exposure of erodible soils

should be reduced to the greatest extent practicable.

(2) Soils should be protected by using temporary vegetation

or mulch or by accelerated establishment of permanent vegetation.
Segments of work should be completed and protected as rapidly as
construction schedules allow.

(3) The rate of runoff from the construction site should be

mechanically retarded and the disposal of runoff should be
controlled.

(4) Sediment resulting from construction should be trapped in

temporary or permanent debris basins.

(5) Dust should be kept within tolerable limits on haul roads

and at the site by applying water or other dust suppressors.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

520-2
 SUBPART A – EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

(6) Temporary bridges or culverts should be used where

fording of streams is objectionable. Borrow should not be taken
from areas where pollution from the operation is inevitable.

(7) Temporary measures should be used to keep erosion under

control if construction is suspended for any appreciable length
of time.

(8) Protection against pollutants such as chemicals, fuels,

lubricants, sewage, etc., should be provided.

(9) Construction should be timed to avoid rainy seasons if

practical.

(l0) Sanitary facilities should not be located over or

adjacent to live streams, wells, or springs.

(11) Grass or brush fires should be prevented.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

520-3
 SUBPART B – FLOOD PLAIN MANAGEMENT

520.10 General.

Flood plain management is essential in the development of plans

to reduce flood damages. Flood plain management requires the
application of sound engineering principles.

520.11 Scope.

Flood plain management includes structural and nonstructural

measures to reduce flood damages and is subject to the rules and
regulations in 7CFR 650.25. Flood plain management assistance
programs are described in l50-Part 506.

520.12 Description.

(a) Flood plain management is a program designed to obtain a

given set of objectives for reducing flood damage. A flood plain
management system should:

(l) Avoid direct or indirect support of flood plain

development if there is a feasible alternative;

(2) Insure that the risk of a flood plain use is compatible

with the degree of flooding expected;

(3) Protect human safety, health, and welfare; and

(4) Preserve and restore important environmental values.

(b) he methods for meeting flood plain management goals may be

grouped under those for "people control" that reduce the effect
of and susceptibility to flooding and those for "flood control"
that reduce the amount of flooding. Flood plain management
includes both structural and nonstructural measures.

520.13 Types of measures.

(a) Structural measures such as dams, channels, and diversions

that are included to modify the flood water are generally well
understood and are not described in this subpart.

(b) Nonstructural measures include the following:

(l) Acquisition includes purchase in fee title or suitable

easements for the purpose of precluding future uses that would be
incompatible with the expected degree of flooding or setting time
limits for which inhabitable buildings can be used.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

520-5
 PART 520 – SOIL AND WATER RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT

(2) Relocation of residential, commercial, industrial, and

other buildings to flood-free areas to reduce or prevent flood
damages.

(3) Regulation includes actions by local government entities

through zoning, building codes, etc., to keep land use compatible
with the expected degree of flooding. Regulation may apply to a
floodway, which is the part of the flood plain that can contain a
flood without causing an excessive increase in the elevation of
the water surface. Usually this increase is l foot but some
communities have a lower limit. The flood fringe is the area of
the flood plain below the increased elevation (as defined above)
and outside the floodway. The floodway is to remain
unobstructed. Development is normally allowed in the flood
fringe is structures are elevated above the area of flooding. In
these areas the need for ingress and egress as well as the
possibility of larger floods occurring must be considered.

(4) Floodproofing consists of modifications of existing

structures, their sites, and building contents to reduce the
probability and adverse effects of water entry. Some general
guidance on floodproofing is in Technical Release No. 57.

(5) Flood warning systems and emergency action plans provide

information on the time of occurrence and magnitude of flooding
to be expected. Features could include visual observations,
stage recorders in streams, precipitation data in the uplands,
continuous or periodic data collection, manual or automatic relay
systems, flood warning markers, etc. The degree of
sophistication varies with the needs of the local community and
the hydrologic characteristics of the area. The warning system
needs to be integrated with the emergency action plan. Both must
be compatible with the local situation. It is desirable to
provide a warning time of several hours--perhaps 10 to 12 hours.
However, if only a 1- or 2-hour warning is possible, the
emergency plan must be implemented with due consideration to the
short time available.

(6) Information and education are essential to any flood

plain management system. The development of needed technical
information and its dissemination to the public, especially local
government officials, planners, and affected landowners, are
essential. Included are flood warning markers that designate, on
the ground, areas subject to flooding so that the hazards can be
recognized. these could be referenced to historic floods,
percent chance floods, or the floodway location.

(7) Flood insurance is a method of spreading economic loss

over time and among a relatively large number of people. It does
not directly reduce damage.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

520-6
 SUBPART B – FLOOD PLAIN MANAGMENT

(8) Flood emergency measures include contingency and

emergency floodproofing that can be completed in anticipation of
flooding. It should be recognized that one of the functions of
overall flood plain management is to reduce the need for this
type of emergency action.

520.14 Risk to life and property.

The risk to human life and property is considered in evaluating

various flood plain management alternatives. Although risk is
difficult to measure, certain physical parameters can be used to
assess the potential risk for each structure.

(a) Frequency of flooding determines the probability of

occurrence. The l00-year frequency flood (l percent chance in
any l year) is the minimum acceptable if there is risk to human
life. For certain critical facilities such as hospitals,
schools, nursing homes, utilities, and facilities for producing
or storing volatile, toxic, or water-reactive materials, the
effects of the 500-year frequency flood should be considered.

(b) Depth of flooding is a crucial factor. Some areas may

tolerate depths of from l to 3 feet without being considered
hazardous to life.

(c) Estimated warning time for evacuation may be significant.

(d) Velocities should be considered either along or in

combination with depth and other parameters.

(e) Combinations of depth (in feet) and velocity (in fps) can
be used as indicators of risk. Products of 5 or 7 have been used
as a limit for "people safety" and values of l5 or 20 for
"structural safety."

(f) Duration of flooding may be a significant factor for some

agricultural crops.

(g) Other factors may also be available to evaluate risk.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

520-7
 SUBPART C - DAMS

520.20 General.

(a) Dams are essential to soil and water resource development.

Controls to insure safety of dams are needed to protect life and
property.

(b) Uniform high quality standards must be used in planning,

design, and construction of dams to ensure consistently safe,
efficient performance.

520.2l Definition and classes.

(a) As used in this manual, a dam is an artificial barrier,

together with any associated spillways and appurtenant works,
that does or may impound or divert water.

(b) Storage is the capacity of the reservoir in acre-feet below

the elevation of the crest of the lowest open channel emergency
spillway or the elevation of the top of the dam if there is no
open channel emergency spillway.

(c) Overall height is the difference in elevation in feet

between the top of dam and the lowest elevation at the downstream
toe.

(d) Effective height is the difference in elevation in feet

between the lowest open channel emergency spillway crest and the
lowest point in the original cross section on the centerline of
the dam. If there is no open channel emergency spillway, the top
of the dam becomes the upper limit.

(e) Dams are classified according to the potential hazard to

life and property if the dam should suddenly breach or fail.
Existing and future downstream development including controls for
future development must be considered when classifying the dam.
The classification of a dam is determined only by the potential
hazard from failure, not by the criteria.

(l) Class (a)--Dams in rural or agricultural areas where

failure may damage farm buildings, agricultural land, or township
and country roads.

(2) Class (b)--Dams in predominantly rural or agricultural

areas where failure may damage isolated homes, main highways, or
minor railroads or interrupt service of relatively important
public utilities.

(3) Class (c)--Dams where failure may cause loss of life or

serious damage to homes, industrial and commercial buildings,
important public utilities, main highways, or railroads.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 3, May 1982)

520-9
 PART 520 – SOIL AND WATER RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT

(f) Some dams have greater significance than others because of

their potential for affecting public safety. The public concern
for safety of dams is often identified with the size of dam and
reservoir. Because dams, even though small, initially may
present no hazard in terms of loss of human life, their degree of
hazard can change as a result of downstream development. Because
of this and the need to manage an overall SCS program for dam
safety, a national inventory of SCS assisted dams is to be
maintained by the Director of Engineering. Each state
conservationist is to develop the inventory in the state.
Procedures for developing and maintaining the inventory are
contained in 290-300. The following dams are to be included in
the inventory and are considered as SCS inventory dams.

(l) All class (b) and (c) dams;

(2) Class (a) dams more than 6 feet in overall height and
with a storage capacity of 50 acre-feet or more; and

(3)Class (a) dams with an overall height of 25 feet or more

and a storage capacity of more then l5 acre-feet.

520.22 Design criteria.

(a) Class (a) earth dams with a product of storage times the
effective height of the dam of less than 3,000 and with an
effective height of the dam of 35 feet or less are to meet or
exceed the requirements of Practice Standard 378, Pond (NHCP).

(b) Class (a) earth dams whose product of storage times the
effective height of the dam is 3,000 or more; those more than 35
feet in effective height; and all Class (b) and (c) dams are to
meet or exceed the requirements of Technical Release No. 60.

(c) Dams of materials other than earth are to comply with the
applicable portions of Practice Standard 378 and Technical
Release No.60. Other features are to meet or exceed the
requirements as stated in other applicable SCS standards.

520.23 Classification.

(a) Classification of dams is to be determined at the time of

inventory and evaluation and verified immediately prior to
construction. The person having the engineering job approval
authority (50l.04 of this manual) is responsible for the
classification. For Class VII and VIII jobs, both the state
conservation engineer and the head of the NTC engineering Staff
are to concur in the classification. They are jointly
responsible for the classification.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 3, May 1982)

520-10
 SUBPART C - DAMS

(b) Documentation of the classification of dams is required.

Documentation is to include but is not limited to location and
description of dam, configuration of the valley, description of
existing development (houses, utilities, highways, railroads,
farm or commercial buildings, and other pertinent improvements),
potential for future development, recommended classification, and
signatures of those performing and concurring in the
classification. It is also to include results obtained from
breach routings, if breach routings are used as part of the
classification process.

(c) If there are indications that any existing dam is

misclassified, including changes resulting from downstream
development, proposals for reclassification are to be submitted
to the state conservation engineer for action. If the state
conservation engineer approves, the dam is officially
reclassified. When this occurs, the case file is to be
documented, proper notification made, and the updated information
added to the inventory of SCS assisted dams. For further
guidance see 440-300.

520.24 Special considerations.

(a) Most of the requirements in Practice Standard 378 and

Technical Release No. 60 are stated as maximum and minimum limits
and are not to be construed as satisfactory criteria for all
dams.

(l) Special considerations are to be given to dams in series,

to those with drainage areas of more than l0 square miles, and to
those located in regions of high earthquake hazard.

(2) Class (a) dams for municipal or industrial water supplies

are to be designed with minimum criteria equivalent to that for
Class (b).

(3) Class (c) dams and those with permanent storage are not
to be constructed over an active fault without the concurrence of
the Director of Engineering.

(b) Local experience, State laws and regulations, site

conditions, or other special features may require the use of more
stringent criteria to insure a satisfactory dam.

520.25 Clearing reservoirs.

(a) Reservoir areas are cleared to facilitate the movement of

water; to provide for the proper functioning of outlets and
spillways; to provide convenient access to dams and related
structures for operation and maintenance; and to comply with
State and local laws and regulations.

(b) The following minimum standards are to be used to determine

the clearing required for reservoir areas:

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

520-11
 PART 520 – SOIL AND WATER RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT

(l) Dry dams. Minimum requirements include:

(i) Reservoir areas are to be cleared to a distance of 200

feet upstream from the principal spillway inlet except that no
clearing is necessary above the elevation of the top of the
inlet.

(ii) Areas immediately upstream from emergency spillways

are to be cleared to the extent required to permit spillways to
function properly.

(2) Dams that retain water in a reservoir. This includes

dams in which space is allocated for sediment storage and dams
that provide water storage for beneficial use. Minimum
requirements include:

(i) Reservoir areas are to be cleared at least up to the

elevation of the crest of the lowest ungated principal spillway
inlet.

(ii) Less clearing may be approved for a specific site if

the structure incorporates fish and wildlife features and the
sponsor or owner requests that the area not be cleared, or if the
cost of clearing is disproportionate to the other costs of the
structure and lack of clearing will not interfere with the
functioning of the reservoir. The minimum area cleared must
extend the full length of the dam for a distance of 400 feet
upstream from the principal spillway and must include the area
upstream from the emergency spillway to the extent required for
it to function properly.

520.26 Independent reviews for dam safety.

(a) Definition of an independent review. An independent review

is an examination and evaluation of procedures used and decisions
made during the design and construction of a dam by peers from
outside SCS or from an organizational unit other than the one
responsible for the design and construction. "Design" is used
here in the broad sense as defined in 511.02.

(b) Purpose of an independent review. Independent reviews are

made to insure that design and construction procedures and
decisions reflect safety considerations as well as economy. Dam
safety considerations are directly related to the potential for
loss of life, damage to valuable property, or disruption of
transportation and utility facilities if the dam fails. The
classification of dams is determined by the potential for such
losses and damage (see 520.2l). The reviewer is to determine
whether the methods of analyses are appropriate and the
assumptions are justified by the site conditions, as well as
whether the results are reasonable. An independent review is not
a substitute for expertise needed during design and construction.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

520-12
 SUBPART C - DAMS
(c) Design reviews. Design reviews are made as established in
511.05. Designs that are coapproved are to be reviewed by the
coapproving office as well as the office with primary
responsibility. If the office responsible for the design and
coapproving office collaborate on the design, the review made for
coapproval purposes is not considered an independent review. The
design review for coapproval purposes can be considered an
independent review only if the coapproving office had little or
no role in the design.

(d) Determination of need for an independent review. All dams

proposed for construction, modification, or repair are to be
evaluated by the state conservation engineer to determine the
need for an independent review. For class (c) dams, factors to
be considered are the degree of hazard, size of dam, reservoir
volume, complexity of site geology, complexity and margin of
safety reflected by the design layout and construction methods,
and any other unique condition or complexity noted during
planning, design, or construction. To determine the need for an
independent review for all other dams, consider site complexity,
unique design features, or other special conditions requiring
special expertise. The need for an independent review is to be
determined during preliminary design (See 5ll.02(c)). For
projects, the determination is to be made during planning when
the preliminary design is prepared.

(e) The procedure for establishing an independent review.

(l) The state conservation engineer and the head of the NTC
Engineering Staff are to make a joint recommendation to the state
conservationist on whether an independent review is needed. The
recommendation is to be supported by a justification statement
and include a brief description of the site, the proposed
structure layout, composition of technical specialists making up
the view team, and other essential data. This is to become a
part of the design folder. An independent review may be
initiated at any state of design or construction.

(2) The state conservationist is responsible for implementing

the independent review. He or she is to advise the Director of
Engineering of the plan to conduct an independent review.

(3) When an independent review is recommended, the state

conservationist is to request from the NTC director a list of
employees and others qualified to make the review. The Director
of Engineering is to be consulted in compiling the list and
provided a copy of the list.
(4) The state conservationist is to make the necessary
arrangements for appointing the review board and assigning their
responsibilities. If the board is composed of more than one
member, a chairperson is to be designated.

(5) The review board is to be permitted to make reviews at

the times they determine necessary. The review assignment is to
require evaluation until construction is completed.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

520-12a
 PART 520 – SOIL AND WATER RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT

520.27 Emergency action plans--class (c) dams.

(a) Applicability. An emergency action plan is to be prepared

for each class (c) dam for which SCS provides technical or
financial assistance. The state conservationist is to determine
that an emergency action plan is prepared prior to the initiation
of construction.

(b) Inundation maps. SCS is to provide appropriate inundation

maps. These maps define areas that would be affected in an
emergency situation and provide other appropriate information.
The inundation areas to be delineated on the maps are to show the
following two conditions:

(l) Outflow from routing the emergency spillway hydrograph

(or larger hydrograph) through the spillways and downstream; and

(2) Discharge due to sudden breach of dam. Unless otherwise

determined by the state conservation engineer, the conditions at
the time of breach may be water level in the reservoir at or
above the crest elevation of the lowest open channel emergency
spillway and "nonstorm" conditions downstream of the dam.

(i) For dams in series, an evaluation should be made to

determine if breach of an upstream dam would endanger a
downstream dam. If the downstream dam is endangered, the breach
inundation map should be based on multiple failure.

(ii) For dams not in series but which would affect a common
downstream area, it is usually adequate to consider the failure
of each dam individually unless special circumstances would
warrant multiple failures.

520.28 Potential impact area--class (a) dams of inventory size

and all class (b) dams.

(a) Applicability. for each class (a) dam of inventory size

and for each class (b) dam, the area that could be inundated in
event of a breach is to be determined. This is done as part of
the classification (520.2l(e)) and its ducumentation (520.23(b)).

(b) Requirements. (l) The potential impact area may be

determined by performing breach routings or by other methods.

(2) The potential impact area is to be clearly described by

the use of maps and/or narrative description. In addition to the
description of the area, precautions s to future development
within the area are to be included. These precautions may be
specific (e.g., if based on breach inundation studies) or may
point out the need for breach routings in the future if
development is ever considered. The landowner or sponsor should
be made aware of the potential impact area as early as
practicable and before expending significant resources in design.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

520-12b
 SUBPART C - DAMS

(c) Distribution. (l) As early as practicable but no later

then initiation of construction, the state conservationist is to
officially transmit the description of the potential impact area
and precautions on development to the owner or sponsor. It is
the responsibility of the owner or sponsor to transmit the
description of the potential impact area and precautions on
development to:

(i) The local land use control agency or county,

(ii) The State agency responsible for dam safety, and

(iii) The conservation districts and others as appropriate.

(2) If requested by the owner or sponsor or if the owner or

sponsor fail to act, the state conservationist is to make the
specified notification.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

520-12c
 SUBPART D –OPEN CHANNELS

520.30 General.

(a) Channels are used for a variety of purposes. Excessive

bank erosion and bed degradation and/or excessive sediment
accumulation may cause channels to function improperly. It is
important that channels be maintained to insure satisfactory
performance for their anticipated life.

(b) The design of stable channels requires many analyses. Some

of the principles are complex and must be applied with adequate
data and sound judgment. The policy in this subpart results from
sound SCS experience, and its application will result in sound
channel design.

520.3l Definition.

An open channel is either a natural or a manmade channel,

excavated in earth or built of structural components, in which
water flows with a free surface.

520.32 Design criteria.

(a) Open earth channels are to meet or exceed the requirements

of Practice Standard 582, Open Channel (NHCP) and Technical
Release No. 25. Exceptions for small drainage areas or other
practices are noted in the Standard.

(b) Open channels of material other than earth are to comply

with the applicable portions of Practice Standard 582 and
Technical Release No. 25. Other features are to meet or exceed
the requirements as stated in other applicable SCS standards.

520.33 Special considerations.

(a) Channel measures installed for fish and wildlife habitat

generally include deflectors, channel sills, and other devices
that may be constructed of permanent materials such as concrete
or semipermanent materials such as wire, logs, rock, and brush.
See Fish and Wildlife Service - Soil Conservation Service Joint
Channel Modification Guidelines.

(l) Measures for fish and wildlife habitat may be divided

into two categories: Permanent measures designed according to
engineering standards and requirements and semipermanent or
temporary measures that do not meet these standards.

(2) Fish habitat improvement measures are to be installed so

that they do not interfere with overall channel flow in a manner
that will contribute to deterioration of the channel cross
section.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

520-13
 PART 520 – SOIL AND WATER RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT

(3) Biologists are responsible for approving the design of

temporary fish habitat improvement measures. Engineers are to
review the planned measures to evaluate their effects on channel
design, operations, and maintenance.

(4) Engineers are to approve or prepare the design of

permanent measures to insure that the anticipated operation is
compatible with the planned overall functioning of the channel
and in accordance with identified biological needs.

(5) If a watershed work plan includes measures described as

temporary, the work plan must include a statement that these
measures are temporary and will require frequent maintenance and
replacement by the sponsors.

(b) Landscape architecture is an important factor of an open

channel. Installed channels are to comply with the principles in
Technical Release No. 65.

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

520-14
 PART 521 - POLLUTION ABATEMENT AND WATER QUALITY IMPROVEMENT
52l.00 General.

(a) Soil and water conservation practices should be planned

and implemented to adequately reduce delivery of pollutants to
surface and ground water in order to meet intended goals. SCS is
authorized to provide assistance to reduce agriculture-related
pollution and to improve water quality. It is the intent of SCS
to integrate water quality considerations into all SCS activities
and programs (see National Instruction No. 460-30l, Dec. l982).
The primary pollutants to be considered, but not limited to, are
sediment, nutrients, pesticides, suspended and dissolved solids,
oxygen-demanding organic materials, toxic substance, and
bacteria. Where appropriate, factors that contribute to marked
changes in water temperature should also be considered.

(b) Pollution abatement and water-quality maintenance and

improvement are to be considered in the planning, design, and
construction phases of conservation operations and project
activities.
52l.0l Pollution abatement in conservation operations.

(a) Planning. Pollution abatement and proper management of

wastes are to be considered in planning resource management
systems and practices in agricultural areas. Individual
practices are to be a part of an overall waste management plan
for the enterprise.

(b) Design. Waste management and pollution abatement systems

are to be designed in conformance with the National Handbook of
Conservation Practices and applicable Federal, State, and local
requirements.

(c) Installation. System components and practices are to be

installed in a sequence that insures that each will function as
intended without being hazardous to others or to the overall
system.

(d) Operation and maintenance. The owner or operation is

responsible for operating and maintaining systems and their
component practices. A written plan for operation and
maintenance is to be prepared and agreed to by owner and
operator.
52l.02 Pollution abatement in project activities.

Pollution abatement at structure sites and throughout the

watershed is to be considered in planning, design, construction,
operation, and maintenance of all project activities. The effect
a project will have on pollution of impounded or downstream
surface water and groundwater is to be evaluated. Appropriate
provisions will be included to minimize pollution. Project water
quality conditions must also be evaluated to assure that the
existing quality is suitable for the intended project uses.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 11, Oct. 1986)

521-1
 PART 521 - POLLUTION ABATEMENT AND WATER QUALITY IMPROVEMENT

52l.03 Effect of SCS activities on water quality.

(a) Conservation operations. The effect of recommended

conservation practices and land use on the quality of surface and
ground water is to be evaluated. Current and potential use of
water as well as public health and established water quality
standards are to be considered.

(b) Project activities. Water-quality investigations,

analyses, and interpretations in project activities are to be
carried out to establish baseline conditions and determine the
effects of projects on the quality of surface and ground water
(see Technical Release No. 58).

52l.04 Effect of water quality on SCS activities.

The effect of the quality of impounded or managed water is to

be considered in SCS-assisted practices and projects.
Impoundments, in particular, are sensitive to nutrients and
pesticides in the water delivered to them. Saline or strongly
acid water can have an adverse effect on many practices. Water
for recreation and many other uses must meet established criteria
relative to pathogens, suspended and dissolved solids, taste and
odor, etc. (See Technical Release No. 58).

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 11, Oct. 1986)

521-2
 SUBCHAPTER C - APPLICATIONS

PART 522 - SNOW SURVEY AND WATER SUPPLY FORECASTING

SUBPART A - RESERVOIR OPERATIONS GUIDE FOR SNOWMELT

522.00 General.

(a) Selecting appropriate storage levels and average release

rates for reservoirs in snowmelt runoff environments is a
prerequisite to sound water management. A number of
impoundments, operated for single or multiple purpose use in the
United States, lack adequate management tools to guide this
process each year. The Reservoir Storage Volume Planning (RSVP)
process in Technical Release 75 (TR-75) has been developed to use
seasonal volume forecasts to improve water management at these
reservoirs.

(b) A number of reservoir operation guides (ROG), formerly

called reservoir operations plans, have been or are being
developed as a result of requests for assistance. These guides
are developed as decision support tools to help reservoir
operators manage their facilities by using streamflow forecasts.
The guides provide a means to optimize water use while minimizing
flood damages. This policy has been developed to assure that
operation guides are technically sound and meet the operators'
needs.

522.01 Authority and Request for Assistance.

A ROG can be prepared for any reservoir upon receipt of a

written request from the reservoir operator or owner. Requests
shall be reviewed by the Soil and Water Conservation District
before forwarding to the State Conservationist for approval.

522.02 Responsibility.

(a) The owner or operator responsibilities are outlined in

the National Operation Maintenance Manual (NO&MM), Operation and
Maintenance Subpart B, 500.14 Responsibilities, (a) Sponsor/land
user, part (3).

522-1
(210-V-NEM, Amend 19, November 1991)
 PART 522 – SNOW SURVEY AND WATER SUPPLY FORECASTING

(b) SCS responsibilities are outlined in NO&MM, Operation and

Maintenance Subpart B, 500.14 Responsibilities, (b) parts (1) and
(2), and include determination of feasibility and desirability of
preparing a guide. This determination will be made jointly by
the State Conservation Engineer and the Water Supply Specialist,
or the Data Collection Office Supervisor. Their respective
concurrence is required before proceeding with the development of
the reservoir operation guide. The reservoir operation guide
shall use the procedures in TR-75.

(c) Federal land or structure administering agency

responsibilities: It is essential that full agreement be reached
between the Federal agency (non-SCS), the sponsor/land user, and
SCS regarding the establishment of a ROG on a Federally owned,
operated or funded structure.

522.03 SCS Technical Review.

The State Conservation Engineer and the Engineering and Water

Supply Forecasting Staffs, WNTC, will be actively involved in the
development and review of the ROGs. A copy of the ROG should be
sent to the state agency responsible for administering dam
regulations during the SCS review process.

522.04 Reservoir Operation Guide Review.

There will be an annual review for the first 3 years of the

ROG for a reservoir by the State Conservation Engineer to
determine its effectiveness as a management tool for the
reservoir. After the first 3 years, the frequency of review
should be reevaluated.

522-2
(210-V-NEM, Amend 19, November 1991)
 SUBPART A – RESERVOIR OPERATIONS GUIDE FOR SNOWMELT

522.05 Reservoir Operation Guide Contents.

The following outline is to be used in preparing a reservoir

operation guide. Topics shown in each section are to be included
only if they apply to the management of the reservoir. This
standard format is intended to ensure comprehensive coverage of
pertinent hydrologic factors and provide a consistent
organization for completed guides. The outline is designed so
that for actual operation of a structure, an operator would
normally only need to refer to sections (e) and (f). The
Reservoir Storage Volume Planning (RSVP) computer programs are a
part of the Centralized Forecasting System (CFS) at the WNTC.
These programs are to be used to generate the volume-outflow
curves contained in each guide.

(a) Introduction
(1) Background for guide request

(i) Requesting sponsor

(ii) Cooperating agencies, if any

(iii) Guide is a decision support tool

(2) Reservoir operation guide objectives

(i) Water conservation

(ii) Flood management

(iii) Fisheries protection

(iv) Recreation

(v) Other

(b) Reservoir Characteristics

(1) History of structure

(i) Engineering firm or agency

(ii) Construction date

(iii) Type of dam

522-3
(210-V-NEM, Amend 19, November 1991)
PART 522 – SNOW SURVEY AND WATER SUPPLY FORECASTING

(2) Primary and secondary purposes of reservoir

(3) Structural dimensions of dam

(4) Storage characteristics of reservoir

(i) Total storage capacity

(ii) Conservation storage

(iii) Recreation pool

(iv) Dead storage

(v) Flood storage

(vi) Surcharge capacity

(vii) Storage vs. elevation information

(viii) Surface area

(5) Release capability

(i) Principal spillway

(ii) Auxiliary spillway

(iii) Pump
(iv) Gated outlet

(v) Other

(6) Special operating characteristics

(i) Radial and other crest control gates

(ii) Use of flashboards

(iii) Restriction on storage (regulatory, court

orders, etc.)

(iv) Seepage

522-4
(210-V-NEM, Amend 19, November 1991)
 SUBPART A – RESERVOIR OPERATIONS GUIDE FOR SNOWMELT

(v) Dam deterioration

(vi) Other

(7) Storage/release pattern for reservoir

(i) Historical end-of-month storage analysis

(ii) Desirable storage pattern--low, average, and

high years

(c) Watershed Characteristics

(1) Location and drainage area

(2) Topography

(i) Geology

(ii) Elevation range

(iii) Area vs. elevation relationship

(3) Climatology (cite references)

(i) Average annual precipitation

(ii) Seasonal distribution of precipitation

(iii) Snowpack accumulation and ablation pattern

(iv) Extremes and variability of precipitation

(4) Streamflow (cite references)

(i) Average annual flow

(ii) Runoff vs. elevation relationship

(iii) Extremes and variability

(iv) Seasonal distribution of streamflow

(v) Flow duration analysis

522-5
(210-V-NEM, Amend 19, November 1991)
 PART 522 – SNOW SURVEY AND WATER SUPPLY FORECASTING

(d) Hydrologic and Meteorologic Data

(1) Streamflow and reservoir records

(i) Reference maps and tables in appendix

(ii) Explain any synthetic inflow calculations

(iii) Accuracy of records

(2) Precipitation and snowpack records

(i) Reference maps and tables in appendix

(ii) Climatological stations

(iii) SCS SNOTEL sites and snow courses

(3) Other data

(i) Diversions

(ii) Temperature data

(iii) Pumping data

(e) Reservoir Volume-Outflow Concept

(1) Theory of curves

(i) Relationship between hydrograph shape and flow

volume

(ii) Evaporation-seepage losses are almost constant

from year-to-year

(iii) Concept of volume-outflow curves with forecasts

to set outflow

(iv) Use of forecasts at probability levels of 50,

10, 30, 70, and 90 percent chance of exceedance
with volume-outflow curves

(v) Figure showing model volume-outflow curves

522-6
(210-V-NEM, Amend 19, November 1991)
 SUBPART A – RESERVOIR OPERATIONS GUIDE FOR SNOWMELT

(2) Use of volume-outflow curves in a typical year

(i) Reference figure of flow, storage, releases

(ii) Explain how forecasts are used to set outflows

(iii) Determining maximum storage level desirable

from upper range of desirable outflow

(3) Management considerations in various years

(i) Average

(ii) High years

(iii) Low years

(4) Desirable outflow range defined

(i) Low flow consideration, e.g., fisheries

(ii) Water rights

(iii) Irrigation demands

(iv) Flood flow threshold-where flood damage occurs

(f) Reservoir Operation

(1) Data needs

(i) Streamflow forecasts

(ii) Storage level in reservoir

(iii) Mid-month forecast updates

(2) Volume-outflow curves for primary forecast periods

(i) April-July

(ii) May-July

(iii) June-July

522-7
(210-V-NEM, Amend 19, November 1991)
PART 522 – SNOW SURVEY AND WATER SUPPLY FORECASTING

(3) Reservoir rule curves

(i) Use of rule curves with volume-outflow curves

(ii) Reservoir rule curves

(4) Low runoff year example - (actual year, if

possible)

(5) Average runoff year example - (actual year, if

possible)

(6) High runoff year example - (actual year, if

possible)

(7) Timing of snowmelt runoff peak

(i) Relationship to snow pillow data

(ii) Variability from year to year

(8) Streamflow recession analysis

(i) Snowmelt recession curve

(ii) Influence of precipitation events

(9) Summary
(i) Guide is an operational tool for risk
assessment and project regulation

(ii) Informed decisions based on probability of

seasonal flows

(iii) Organizes planning process

(iv) Relevant information in one document

(v) Guide should be reviewed annually

(vi) SCS contacts for assistance and/or

interpretations

522-8
(210-V-NEM, Amend 19, November 1991)
 SUBPART A – RESERVOIR OPERATIONS GUIDE FOR SNOWMELT

(g) Annual Review

(1) Recommendations

(2) Record of review

(h) APPENDICES

(1) Watershed characteristics

(i) Location map, elevation map, data sites map,

area vs. elevation curve

(ii) Average annual precipitation map

(iii) Seasonal precipitation map

(iv) Average annual runoff map

(2) Reservoir records

(i) Elevation vs. storage table

(ii) Principal spillway or gated outlet rating table

(iii) Auxiliary spillway rating table

(iv) Pumping plant rating

(v) Historical end-of-month reservoir records

(vi) Average reservoir storage hydrograph

(3) Streamflow records

(i) Historical monthly streamflow data

(ii) Annual inflow hydrographs

(iii) Mean annual inflow hydrograph

(iv) Frequency analysis of seasonal volumes

(4) Precipitation records

522-9
(210-V-NEM, Amend 19, November 1991)
 PART 522 – SNOW SURVEY AND WATER SUPPLY FORECASTING

(5) Snowpack records

(i) Snow course and snow pillow monthly data

(ii) Snow pillow hydrographs

(i) Averages

(1) Monthly reservoir

(2) Monthly streamflow

(3) Monthly precipitation

(4) Monthly snow course

(j) Approval

(1) Example attached

522-10
(210-V-NEM, Amend 19, November 1991)
 SUBPART A - RESERVOIR OPERATION GUIDE FOR SNOWMELT

"We, the undersigned individuals, as authorized by the laws and

regulations of the State of Anystate, have reviewed this
Reservoir Operation Guide and find it acceptable for the
operation of Anyplace Reservoir."

__________________________ ______________________________
Operator Soil and Water Conservation
District

__________________ ___________________
Date Date

__________________________ ______________________________
State Conservationist State Conservation Engineer

__________________ ___________________
Date Date

522-11
(210-V-NEM, Amend 19, November 1991)
 PART 523 - IRRIGATION

523.00 General.

Irrigation is the efficient application of water to land areas

for purposes of sustained agricultural crop production. This requires
proper evaluation of the soil or land surface materials so they are
compatible with the planned plantings; evaluation of water source for
quality and quantity; evaluation of the land surface topography and
water delivery and distribution system layout; and operation skill
levels for proper management. Irrigation increases the capability to
not only produce a variety of crops, but also allows for better
control of quantity and quality of the crop. It allows land
susceptible to excessive erosion to be taken out of row crops and
returned to permanent vegetative cover. Increases in irrigation have
accentuated the need to manage the application to water, minimize
erosion, use the water resources wisely, and thus maintain the quality
of surface and ground water. The objectives of a resource management
system, which often includes irrigation, are to achieve acceptable
levels of quality for sustained use of the resources, adequately
protect the environment, and provide an acceptable standard of living.

523.01 Technical assistance.

SCS is a recognized leader in irrigation Technology, especially

in plant, soil, and water management. The Service helps landowners
develop resource conservation systems necessary to meet the
conservation needs of the land; develop technical materials and
standards; train landowners, contractors, manufacturers, and others in
design and use of systems compatible with soil conditions and plant
needs; and assists other federal agencies and foreign governments.
SCS provides landowners direct technical assistance with on-farm
irrigation water management. With limited resources, priorities for
furnishing technical and financial assistance must be carefully
assessed.

523.02 Irrigation guides.

Each state conservationist is responsible for preparing an

irrigation guide setting forth the basic design and management
criteria for all conservation irrigation methods applicable to local
combinations of soils slopes, crops, water supply, and climatic
conditions. The state conservationist may assign leadership
responsibility to someone on his or her Staff for developing or
updating the irrigation guide. Although SCS has the technical
responsibility for preparing the irrigation guide, cooperation from
others is desirable, such as representatives of the state university,
state experiment stations, Extension Service, and Agricultural
Research Service. A suggested outline for the Irrigation Guide is
provided in the National Engineering Handbook, Section 15, Chapter 3,
Planning Farm Irrigation Systems.

(210-V-NEM Amend. 8, February 1985)

523-1
 PART 523 - IRRIGATION

523.03 Assistance on irrigation projects.

SCS policy is to assist individual farmers, farmer groups, and

legal entities to install irrigation practices that maximize the
conservation uses of soil and water resources and minimize operation
and management problems. SCS plans and designs conveyance systems
that measure and control irrigation water deliveries to each water
user. In irrigation land treatment projects, SCS plans and designs
on-farm systems.

523.04 Water management for salinity control.

Water management recommendations will be made that will result in

control of salinity both on and off site. Some soluble salts in the
soil and irrigation water are toxic to plants. Water management
recommendations will consider control of salinity within the root zone
and in return flows (off site). The key to soil salinity control is a
net downward movement of soil water in the crop root zone. Poor
internal drainage may necessitate installation of improved drainage
measures.

523.05 Irrigation training.

SCS will develop and maintain an adequately trained and informed

Staff which understands the principles or irrigation system design,
operation and management. SCS will maintain a coordinated training
program that includes a series of courses covering soil-plant-water
relationships, methods of estimating evapotranspiration, methods of
scheduling irrigations, system design, system evaluation and
management, and the use of the latest Technology and equipment. The
Service also provides training and technical instructions to
contractors and landowners who install and/or manage an irrigation
system.

(210-V-NEM Amend. 8, February 1985)

523-2
 PART 524 – DRAINAGE

(Reserved.)

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

524-1
 SUBCHAPTER D – TECHNOLOGY

PART 530 - HYDROLOGY

SUBPART A - HYDROLOGIC INVESTIGATIONS

530.00 General.
530.01 Available hydrologic information.
503.02 Hydrometeorological instrumentation.
503.03 Hydrologic reports.

SUBPART B - HYDROLOGIC PROCEDURES AND CRITERIA

530.10 General.
530.11 Hydrologic procedures.
530.12 Hydrologic criteria.

PART 531 - GEOLOGY

SUBPART A - GEOLOGIC SITE INVESTIGATIONS

531.00 General.
531.01 Soil and rock descriptions.
531.02 Site ecology.
531.03 Minimum requirements.
531.04 Site selection.
531.05 Preliminary investigations.
531.06 Detailed investigations.
531.07 Soil and rock samples.
531.08 Geologic mapping.
531.09 Geologic investigations for channels.
531.10 Investigations of water storage reservoir sites
531.11 Investigations during construction.
531.12 Geologic reports.

SUBPART B - GROUND WATER INVESTIGATIONS

531.20 General.
531.21 Ground water management.
531.22 Site investigations.
531.23 Resource Investigations.
531.24 Procedures.

(210-V NEM, Second Edition, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

i
 SUBPART C - OTHER GEOLOGIC INVESTIGATIONS

531.30 Resource planning.

531.31 Other geologic investigations.

SUBPART D - DAMS SUBJECT TO DEEP SUBSIDENCE

531.40 General.
531.41 Scope.
531.42 Layered mineral deposits.
531.43 Liquid or gaseous deposits.

SUBPART E - DISPOSITION OF SOIL AND ROCK SAMPLES

531.50 General.
531.51 Guidelines.

SUBPART F - OUARANTINES ON MOVEMENT OF SOIL SAM PLES

AND SOIL MOVING EOUIPMENT

531.60 General.
531.61 Scope.
531.62 Receiving facilities.
531.63 Packaging.
531.64 Shipment.
531.65 Overseas samples.
531.66 Equipment used to collect or move soil.
531.67 Regulated counties and APHIS district offices.

SUBPART G - EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION INVESTIGATIONS AND

SERVICES

531.70 General
531.71 Damages caused by erosion and sediment.
531.72 Sediment storage allocation for reservoirs.
531.73 Sedimentation and erosion studies for channel
modification.
531.74 Effects of land treatment and structural measures on
sedimentation.
531.75 Reservoir sedimentation surveys.
531.76 Investigations related to water quality.
531.77 Structural deficiencies caused by sedimentation.
531.78 Special erosion and sediment studies.

(210-V NEM, Second Edition, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

ii
 SUBPART H - ANNUAL SUMMARY OF SEDIMENTATION ACTIVITIES

531.80 General
531.81 Reports

PART 532 - BIOLOGICAL AND AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING

532.00 General.
532.01 NRCS Biological and Agricultural engineering assistance.
532.02 Non-NRCS Biological and Agricultural engineering
assistance.

PART 533 - SOIL ENGINEERING

SUBPART A - ENGINEERING CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS

533.00 General.
533.01 Scope.
533.02 Soil classification systems.

SUBPART B - SOIL MECHANICS OPERATIONS

533.10 General.
533.11 Data collection.
533.12 Testing.
533.13 Soil engineering analyses.
533.14 National benefit activities.

SUBPART C - ENGINEERING INTERPRETATIONS OF SOIL SURVEYS

533.20 General.
533.21 Scope.
533.22 Engineering responsibilities.

PART 534 - HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING

(Reserved)

(210-V NEM, Second Edition, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

iii
 PART 535 - LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE

535.00 General.
535.01 Definitions.
535.02 Services.
535.03 Technical quality.

PART 536 - STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

536.00 General.
536.01 Standard detail drawings.
536.02 Use of standard detail drawings.
536.03 Adaptation of standard detail drawings.
536.04 Revision of standard detail drawings.
536.05 Availability of standard detail drawings to the public.
536.06 National standard detail drawings.
536.07 NTC standard detail drawings.
536.08 4100 Series standard drop-spillway drawings.
536.09 State standard detail drawings.
536.10 Standard detail drawings prepared by non-NRCS engineers.
536.11 Reserved.
536.12 Reserved.
536.13 Reserved.
536.14 Reserved.
536.15 Reserved.
536.16 Reserved.
536.17 Reserved.
536.18 Reserved.
536.19 Reserved.
536.20 Design Criteria for reinforced Concrete.

(210-V NEM, Second Edition, Amend. 23, Sept. 1997)

iv
 SUBCHAPTER D - TECHNOLOGY

PART 530 - HYDROLOGY

SUBPART A - HYDROLOGIC INVESTIGATIONS

530.00 General.

Hydrologic investigations and analyses are essential for

determining the location, quantity, timing, and availability of
water resources in the planning and design of water related
structures and projects, and for the project evaluation.
Hydrologic investigations and analyses rely on available
hydrologic data such as volumes and rates of stream flow,
meteorological data such as precipitation rates and amounts, and
watershed characteristics. If hydrometeorological data are
inadequate, the installation of instruments for the collection of
data may be necessary. Instrumentation may also be required for
reservoir operation to make effective use of available storage to
meet project objectives.

530.01 Available hydrologic information.

To the extent possible, available hydrologic information is to

be used for planning, design, and operation of water-related
structures and systems. Basic data on stream flow are available
from the US Geological Survey (USGS) through its water data
storage and retrieval system (WATSTORE) and the USGS homepage on
the Internet. Precipitation and related climatological data are
available from the National Water and Climate Center (NWCC) of
NRCS and the National Climatic and Data Center (NCDC) and
technical papers and reports of the National Weather Service
(NWS). Other sources of hydrologic information include
Agricultural Research Service (ARS); Forest Service (FS); and
federal, state and local agencies having planning and/or
operational responsibilities for water-related projects.

Hydrometeorological data may be found in various reports about

the watershed, river basin or floodplain. These reports should
be in the libraries of the various federal agencies involved in
report preparation.

530-1
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 530 - HYDROLOGY

530.02 Hydrometeorological instrumentation.

(a) Definition. Hydrometeorological instruments include, but

are not limited to, water stage recorders; devices for measuring
snow depth and snow-water content; and instruments for collecting
data on precipitation, soil moisture, maximum and minimum
temperatures, wind direction and speed, relative humidity,
evaporation, and solar radiation.

(b) Determining need. Hydrometeorological instrumentation is

required for project planning if data are inadequate for making
reliable estimates for project development. This requirement is
particularly important for projects that include storage for
irrigation or other beneficial use and for which accurate
estimates of available water supply are essential to the
project’s performance and justification. If a statistically
viable sample is needed for hydrologic analysis, a minimum of 10
years of data is required.

(c) Planning for hydrometeorological instrumentation.

(1) A plan for collecting needed hydrologic data is to be

developed at the earliest possible date, consistent with project
planning or project operation objectives. This plan is to
include a statement of justification for the instrumentation; the
type of instruments required including numbers, kind, and
proposed location; a schedule for installation; and anticipated
operation and maintenance costs.

(i) For planning and formulation. If additional

hydrometeorological data are required for planning, instruments
are to be installed as soon as practical after planning begins.
Hydrometeorological instruments installed for planning may be
temporary or permanent depending on their probable future
usefulness.

(ii) For operation. If hydrometeorological data are

required for operation, planning for hydrometeorological
instrumentation is to proceed concurrently with other planning
activities. The project plan is to include a justification for
the instrumentation and describe the required instruments,

530-2
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 530 - HYDROLOGY

including numbers, kind, and location; a schedule for

installation; and anticipated operation and maintenance costs.
For operation and to ensure that the maximum length of record is
available, hydrometeorological instruments are to be installed as
soon as possible after the plan is approved.

(iii) For both planning and operation.

Hydrometeorological instruments selected for planning purposes
are usually as inexpensive as possible to keep planning costs to
a minimum. If hydrometeorological instruments will be useful for
both planning and operation, select a site that permits future
installation of more sophisticated equipment and/or additional
instruments at a later date, if needed.

(iv) Post project approval. Projects authorized for

construction that did not include needed hydrometeorological
instruments in the initial plan should be supplemented to include
the needed instruments. The plan supplement should include items
and details outlined in preceding paragraph (ii).

(2) In developing proposals that include

hydrometeorological instrumentation, the guidelines established
in Office of Management & Budget (OMB) Memorandum M-92-1,
“Coordination of Water Resources Information,” and Circular A-62,
“Policies and Procedures for the Coordination of Federal
Meteorological Services,” are to be followed to avoid duplication
of effort and to ensure efficiency of the data collection system.
Instrumentation may be required for planning, operation, or both.

(d) Installing hydrometeorological instruments. For planning,

hydrometeorological instruments are to be installed as soon as
possible after planning is authorized to ensure that the maximum
length of record is available.

(e) Operating and maintaining hydrometeorological

instruments.

(1) Cost of operating and maintaining hydrometeorological

stations used to operate the project reservoirs or other project
measures are the responsibility of the sponsors. Funds are not
to be used for sharing of operating and maintenance costs. Funds

530-3
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 530 - HYDROLOGY

may be used for instruments and for analysis of data needed for
planning and designing a reservoir. These funds should be
included as part of the engineering services cost of the
structure. Snow survey or other appropriate federal funds may be
used.

(2) If requested, and if the sponsors reimburse NRCS for

the costs, NRCS can help operate and maintain hydrometeorological
instruments including the collection and analysis of data. NRCS
may share in operation and maintenance costs if installed
hydrometeorological stations provide data used outside the
project area and NRCS has responsibility to provide data.

(f) Inspection and follow up. Significant items to consider

in inspection and follow up include evidence that:
hydrometeorological instruments are maintained in good working
order so that reliable data are obtained; data are collected and
used in a timely manner according to the operating needs of the
reservoir; forecast procedures are updated and accuracy improved
as additional data are collected; and reservoir gates and other
project features are operated so as to regulate the storage or
release of water for project purposes in accordance with the
operation and maintenance agreement.

(g) Funding hydrometeorological instruments. Costs of

installing instruments required for project development are
planning costs and should be charged to that activity. Approval
to spend planning funds for hydrometeorological instruments shall
be commensurate with the required type of monitoring.
Influencing factors include cost and length of time monitoring
will be required. If long-term monitoring is required, the
likelihood of long-term funding should be considered. Requests
for approval should include a description of the required
instruments including numbers, kind, and location, a schedule for
installation, and a statement of justification.

530-4
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 530 - HYDROLOGY

530.03 Hydrologic reports.

(a) Hydrologic reports provide:

(1) A record of investigations performed.

(2) Factors considered in selection of project

alternatives.

(3) Information for future studies.

(4) A record of how a structure or system of structures

operates under design conditions.

(b) Reports may include, but are not limited to, the
following:

(1) Investigation of water supply for a water storage site.

(2) Effects of alternative systems of floodwater retarding

structures on downstream discharges.

(3) Report on unusual storm or flood discharge.

(4) Report on field study of emergency spillway

performance.

(5) Reservoir Operation Plans.

(6) Floodplain Management and Flood Insurance Reports.

(7) Dam breach and inundation studies for emergency action

plans (EAP).

(8) Water budget analysis for wetland restoration,

enhancement, and construction.

(c) Review and Approval of Reports

The preparation, review, and approval of these reports and

investigations must be consistent with the job approval
authority.

530-5
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 530 - HYDROLOGY

SUBPART B - HYDROLOGIC PROCEDURES AND CRITERIA

530.10 General.

Hydrologic procedures have been developed within NRCS to

assist in the planning and design of on-farm conservation
practices, including water control structures, and to solve
hydrologic problems encountered in developing plans and designs
for project activities. Because structure or project costs may
range from several hundred to several million dollars, it is
important that the most suitable hydrologic procedure be used for
a particular problem. The procedure selected must provide the
desired level of accuracy and complement other design procedures
to ensure that the structure or project meets its functional
objective. Hydrologic criteria for designing conservation
practices and water control structures have been developed
largely from field experience and represent minimum acceptable
standards consistent with the objectives of the practice or
structure.

530.11 Hydrologic procedures.

(a) Procedures in the Engineering Field Handbook, (EFH),

Chapter 2, are the preferred methods for hydrologic analysis for
on-farm conservation practices. It shall be used unless
specifically excepted by the approving engineer.

(b) Procedures in Part 630 of the Directives System and

designated references are to be used for hydrologic analysis of
soil and water conservation practices to the maximum extent
practicable. These hydrologic procedures include Urban Hydrology
for Small Watersheds (Part 728.50 formally TR-55) and Computer
Program for Project Formulation - Hydrologic Investigations (Part
730.30 formally TR-20).

(c) Procedures outside the scope of the National Engineering

Handbook, Section 4, Hydrology, (NEH-4) and other designated
references may be used if prior approval has been obtained from
the approving engineer.

530-6
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 530 - HYDROLOGY

530.12 Hydrologic criteria.

Hydrologic criteria established in standards and directives

are to be used for designing conservation practices and water
control structures. Exceptions to use of national criteria are
to be obtained from the Director of the Conservation Engineering
Division. Requests for such action are to include the
recommendations of the approving engineer.

All engineers and technicians shall be trained in the use of

NRCS hydrologic procedures needed for the planning, design, and
installations of conservation measures.

530-7
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

SUBPART 531A - GEOLOGIC INVESTIGATIONS

531.00 General

Appropriate consideration of regional, local, and onsite geologic conditions is basic

to sound conservation planning and engineering design in all NRCS programs. The NRCS
geologist has responsibility for geologic investigations and interpretations for NRCS
projects. Where state staffs lack a geologist, the state conservation engineer
determines the need for and secures the services of a qualified geologist. However,
depending on the needed intensity of investigation, there are conditions, as defined
in this policy, under which it is appropriate for trained non-geologists to conduct
site investigations.

531.01 Scope and intensity of geologic investigation

The scope and intensity of geologic investigation shall be consistent with the
geologic and geomorphic complexity and stability of the site; pertinent social,
economic and safety considerations; size and purpose of the structure, practice or
project; kinds of construction materials to be used; and the potential for damage or
loss of life if the structure or practice fails.

As a minimum, geologic investigations conducted by the NRCS shall conform to guidance

in ASTM D 420, Standard Guide to Site Characterization for Engineering, Design, and
Construction Purposes, to foster consistency of practice and to ensure rational,
flexible planning of the investigation.

Types of geologic investigations include geologic reconnaissance, preliminary geologic

investigation, detailed geologic investigation, and construction investigation (as-
built).

A geologic reconnaissance described in 531.02 is required for all dam sites, and
conservation practices, components of practices, or structures that involve
significant ground construction activity, such as ponds, pond sealing, waste storage
facilities, streambank and shoreline protection, stream channel stabilization, wetland
development or restoration, and mine reclamation.

Investigations are conducted by a person holding the appropriate job-approval

authority for the class of structure, as outlined in 501.04, and who is trained to
recognize geologic hazards. A geologist shall conduct investigations in areas where
experience or information is limited, where geologic conditions are complex or
unstable; where the kinds of construction materials to be used are complex or
questionable; and where the potential for damage or loss of life is high if the
structure or practice fails.

531.02 Requirements for geologic reconnaissance

Geologic reconnaissance includes the collection and review of existing data; a site
visit to assess engineering and geomorphic feasibility of the site; and consideration
of how operation of the proposed project, structure, or practice might adversely
impact local resources, particularly soil, surface waters (including the sediment-
water balance), and ground water.

Before going to the field, all available pertinent technical materials, such as
regional and state geologic maps, topographic maps, well logs, aerial photographs,
satellite imagery, soil surveys, water quality reports, mineral resource surveys, and
published and unpublished reports of the site or similar sites are reviewed.

A site visit shall be conducted to assess the engineering significance of the geologic
setting, topography, site drainage, soil and rock materials, and other conditions in
the area that can affect the suitability of the site for its intended use. The local
physical resources in the area, including sediment, soils, surface waters, and ground
water are identified, as well as offsite resources that may be impacted by project
implementation. The resources are assessed in terms of the potential adverse impacts
that operation of the proposed project, structure, or practice may have on them.

If the proposed structure is a dam, the reconnaissance shall include determination of

whether any conditions listed in 531.25 will affect the site.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-1
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

The results of the geologic reconnaissance are used to assess the need for more
detailed investigation and whether additional technical expertise is needed. These
needs are based on site complexity and experience of personnel in the project area.
The findings, conclusions, and recommendations for additional investigation are
documented as prescribed in 531.15.

Documentation includes a geologic map prepared according to 531.14. The map is filed
with the geologic report.

531.03 Requirements for preliminary geologic investigations

Preliminary geologic investigation is conducted to provide sufficient information upon

which reliable project cost estimates can be made in the planning phase of a project,
and to determine the need for additional investigation.

All outcrops, cut banks, and other surface exposures are thoroughly inspected.
Erosion conditions, landslides, seeps, springs, and other pertinent conditions in and
adjacent to the watershed are examined. The information is gathered in the context of
site feasibility for project implementation and engineering performance.

The need for detailed subsurface investigation must be determined. In areas of

generally homogeneous soils and known geologic conditions, a detailed investigation
may not be necessary for small, low-hazard structures such as farm ponds, drop
structures, or chutes. For such structures, the relevant engineering characteristics
of site materials and conditions need only be recognized and evaluated on the basis of
experience in the area.

The investigation shall be sufficiently detailed to furnish the planning team with
information for making sound preliminary designs and cost estimates.

The findings, conclusions, and recommendations for additional detailed subsurface

investigations are documented as prescribed in 531.15.

A geologic evaluation map or sketch shall be included in the documentation and

prepared according to 531.14. The location of all pertinent geologic features in the
project area, such as rock outcrops, springs, seeps, water wells, landslides, streams,
and gullies are documented.

531.04 Requirements for detailed geologic investigations

Detailed geologic investigation is conducted to provide detailed surface and

subsurface information needed for sound project design, layout, construction, and safe
operation of the structure or practice throughout its design life. Geologic
investigations shall conform to meet all state laws and regulations.

A geologic investigation plan shall be prepared by the investigating geologist and

design engineer prior to conducting a detailed investigation.

Detailed investigation includes any combination of the following:

• seismic evaluation;
• quantitative or semi-quantitative geomorphic evaluation;
• developing sediment budgets (including sediment production, transport, and yield);
and
• subsurface investigation; and (5) obtaining samples for laboratory testing and
performing in situ field tests.

All geologic conditions that may influence design, layout, construction, and safe
functioning of the structure shall be investigated, characterized, and documented.
Documentation shall include a geologic map prepared according to 531.14 and a geologic
report that conforms to 531.15.
The tools used in subsurface investigation vary from site to site depending on local
conditions, and may include geophysical surveys, such as electromagnetic, ground
penetrating radar, and seismic refraction or reflection; power equipment, such as core
drills, backhoes, bulldozers, and augers; cone penetrometers; and hand tools. The
results of all geophysical surveys shall be verified by penetrative exploration or
correlation with nearby outcrops and other physical features.

Seepage potential of the permanent pool area and dam site of water holding reservoir
sites shall be evaluated.
(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)
531-2
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

Exploratory bore holes shall be not be left uncovered overnight. At completion of the
investigation, all test pits, exploratory bore holes, and trenches are back filled in such a
manner as to protect ground water quality and to remove the physical hazard to people, animals,
and machinery.

531.05 Requirements for geologic investigation during construction and project implementation

Geologic investigation shall be conducted during construction and the project implementation
phase on all Group I dams as defined in 531.20 to verify all assumptions and interpretations made
in previous investigations and to identify differing conditions that may impact the long term
performance of the structure. Differing geologic conditions that require design modification
shall be documented in the as-built records.

If an unanticipated geologic condition that requires design modification is encountered during

construction of any NRCS project, structure, practice, or component, the responsible field person
shall notify and apprise the state conservation engineer as soon as possible. The state
conservation engineer shall determine the need for and secure the services of a qualified
geologist to conduct a site visit to assess the encountered geologic condition and provide
interpretations and technical support for design or installation changes.

531.06 Geologic investigations of existing structures:

(a) Repair and rehabilitation

Engineering structures and practices requiring repair or rehabilitation may need additional
geologic information to support design changes that may result from a change to a higher
structure class, changes in criteria or standards, or a lack of specific information in the area
of interest.

The determination of the adequacy of available geologic information is conducted as part of the
design review process, explained in 501.05. The design engineer and geologist shall jointly
determine the need for a geologic plan of investigation based on the results of the review.

Policies provided in Subpart B - Dam Site Investigations, and Subpart D - Erosion and
Sedimentation Investigations, apply for geologic investigations for repair or rehabilitation of
engineering structures and practices. Geologic information is gathered to address
• the needs for sound engineering design and
• the potential impacts on applicable local physical resources, including soil quality,
sediment quality, ground water and surface water quality, and stream channel stability.

Investigations of impoundment structures and practices shall address the sediment pool in terms
of:
• The location, type, and quality of sediment that will be affected by rehabilitation
measures.
• The location, type, and quality of sediment that will be exposed to erosion and
• downstream transport.
• The location, type, and quality of sediment that will be dredged or excavated to reclaim
designed water or sediment storage.
• The effects of changes in the sediment-water balance on the geomorphic stability of the
stream channel downstream of the site.

The geologic report is filed with the engineering records for the repaired or rehabilitated
structure or practice.

(b) Geologic investigations for decommissioning of structures

Engineering structures and practices selected for decommissioning may involve the complete or
partial removal of a structure, or a change in its original design function.

The determination of the adequacy of available geologic information is conducted as part of the
design review process, explained in 501.05. The design engineer and geologist shall jointly
determine the need for a geologic plan of investigation based on the results of the review.

Policies provided in Subpart B - Dam Site Investigations, and Subpart D - Erosion and
Sedimentation Investigations, apply for geologic investigations for decommissioning of
engineering structures and practices. Geologic information is gathered to address:
• the needs for sound engineering design and
• the potential impacts on applicable local physical resources, including soil quality,
sediment quality, ground water and surface water quality, and stream channel stability.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-3
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

Investigations of impoundment structures and practices selected for decommissioning

shall address the sediment pool in terms of:
• The location, type, and quality of sediment that will be affected by
decommissioning measures.
• The location, type, and quality of sediment that will be exposed to erosion and
downstream transport.
• The location, type, and quality of sediment that will be dredged or excavated.
• The effects of changes in the sediment-water balance on the geomorphic stability
of the stream channel downstream of the site.

The geologic report is filed with the engineering records for the decommissioned
structure or practice.

531.07 Cultural and scientific resources discovered at site

Materials discovered during site investigation or construction that may have

historical, archeological, cultural, or scientific significance or value, are reported
according to policy contained in GM-420, Part 401, Cultural Resources (Archeological
and Historical Properties).

531.08 Erosion, sediment, and pollution control during site investigations

Criteria for erosion, sediment, and pollution control contained in 520.01 apply during
geologic site investigations.

531.09 Classification of earth (geologic) materials

(a) Soil
Soil material shall be classified in the field according to the Unified Soil
Classification System, ASTM D 2488, Standard Practice for Description and
Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure). Samples for laboratory testing and
analysis are classified according to ASTM D 2487, Standard Test Method for
Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes, as explained in 533.01.

(b) Rock
Rock material is classified by common rock type names according to a simplified
geologic scheme, such as NEH Part 628, Chapter 52, table 52-1. Rock used for specific
engineering purposes in NRCS work is classified by TR-71, Rock Material Field
Classification System.

(c) Transitional materials

Earth material that is transitional between soil and rock is classified by its genetic
category and unconfined compressive strength. Strength is estimated in the field by
hardness tests given in NEH Part 628, Chapter 52, tables 52-2, 52-3, and 52-4.
Transitional material that can be classified by criteria in ASTM D 2488 is considered
soil for classification purposes.

531.10 Logging soil and rock

Field logs and documentation of geologic investigations should conform to guidance in

ASTM D 5434, Standard Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Explorations of Soil and
Rock; and ASTM D 2113, Standard Practice for Diamond Core Drilling for Site
Investigation.

531.11 Preserving, transporting, and storing soil and rock samples

Requirements conform to ASTM D 4220, Standard Practices for Preserving and

Transporting Soil Samples; ASTM D 5079, Standard Practices for Preserving and
Transporting Rock Core Samples; and ASTM D 2113, Standard Practice for Diamond Core
Drilling for Site Investigation.

All rock cores are labeled and photographed according to ASTM D 5079 and ENG Geology
Note 5. Photographs are annotated and filed with the project design folder. Policy
provided in 533.11, Soil Mechanics Data Collection, applies during geologic
investigation.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-4
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

531.12 Disposition of soil and rock samples

The storage and maintenance of soil and rock samples cannot be continued indefinitely. However,
their engineering significance and replacement costs need to be carefully considered prior to
disposal.

Soil samples stored at project locations for purposes of site showings and material
classification may be disposed of after completion of the construction contract.

Rock core stored at project locations for purposes of site showings and material classification
may be disposed of after photographic documentation and logging of the core are completed or
after completion of the construction contract.

Soil and rock samples tested at NRCS facilities may be disposed of at the discretion of the
facility.

For sites with special construction or material problems, the submitting NRCS office may request
the testing facility to hold the samples for a specified period. Such samples are disposed of by
the facility with the concurrence of the submitting office. All soil and rock samples are stored
and discarded in compliance with all applicable pest control regulations, as explained in 531.13.

Before soil samples and rock cores are discarded, they may be offered to a state geological
survey or geological repository; school, college, or university geology, engineering,
archaeology, or anthropology department; or any interested civil or cultural organization.

531.13 Quarantines on movement of soil samples, and soil sampling and moving equipment.

Soil movement regulations are designed to stop the human-assisted spread of agricultural pests,
such as imported fire ant, corn cyst nematode, golden nematode, witchweed, and Mexican Fruit Fly.
The shipping or transport of all soil samples and soil moving equipment under any NRCS activity
or program shall conform to regulations of the Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service
(APHIS), USDA.

Soil samples from regulated areas, shall be shipped only to USDA approved facilities for
processing, testing, or analysis. The current list of regulated areas is available from APHIS:

US Department of Agriculture
Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service
Plant Protection and Quarantine Programs, Permit Unit
4700 River Road
Riverdale, MD 20737
Telephone 301-734-8896
Internet Location: Http://www.aphis.usda.gov
Soil samples from regulated areas are not sent or transported to any facility without first
determining whether the receiving facility is approved by APHIS. The following NRCS facilities
are approved by APHIS to receive soil samples:
National Soil Mechanics Center (NSMC) - Lincoln, NE
NSMC - Ft. Worth, TX
National Soil Survey Center - Lincoln, NE
The NSMC, Lincoln, NE is the only NRCS facility that accepts Pacific Basin and foreign soil
materials.
Private facilities shall apply to the appropriate APHIS headquarters for approval in order to
receive NRCS soil samples.

Land owners and operators who receive NRCS technical assistance but ship their own soil samples
to private facilities must be informed of these regulations.

(a) Packaging
All soil samples from regulated areas must be shipped so that no spillage or breakage occurs in
transit. Undisturbed samples in moisture-proof containers may be shipped in the usual manner.
Other samples must be shipped in containers that resist tearing and puncturing. Canvas bags
inside wooden or metal boxes are most desirable. Small samples may be shipped inside heavy
plastic bags inside strong canvas bags, each tied separately and securely.
Soil samples taken from below a depth of 3 ft in regulated areas may be shipped as UNREGULATED
samples if care is taken not to contaminate them while collecting and preparing them for
shipment. If there is any question of contamination, ship as REGULATED.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-5
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

(b) Labeling of samples. All samples shall be labeled with the following information: date
of sample, project location (project name, county, state) depth interval of sample, sampling
location number, name of securing sample.

(c) Shipment. The exterior of each shipping carton containing regulated soil samples must
be clearly marked CONTENTS: SOIL SAMPLES.

(1) Domestic samples. Each sample is identified by stamping or printing the word
REGULATED in red on both the inside and outside tags. Samples sent to the National Soil
Mechanics Center Labs shall be identified as REGULATED on Form NRCS-ENG-534, Soil Sample List,
and Form NRCS-ENG-356, Request for Soil Mechanics Laboratory Test.

(2) Overseas samples. All soil samples from any foreign source, offshore possession,
or Hawaii shall be shipped under permit. Form PPQ-525 is required and is obtained from APHIS
(address given in 321.14 above)

(d) Equipment used to sample or move soil

Equipment and hand tools used to collect soil samples in regulated areas shall be thoroughly
cleaned of all soil residues at the collection site before removal to unregulated areas.

Soil-moving equipment being moved from regulated areas to unregulated areas shall be cleaned of
all soil residues at the work site from which it is being moved. These regulations shall apply to
NRCS-owned and operated equipment, as well as to the tools and equipment of drilling and earth-
moving contractors.

Contractors shall be advised of quarantine requirements through the applicable clause in bid
notifications and contracts as covered under GENERAL or SPECIAL PROVISIONS.

(e) Regulated counties and APHIS district offices

Contact APHIS (address above) for the current list of counties under Federal domestic plant
quarantine, including address and phone number of APHIS headquarters in each state.

531.14 Geologic maps

An engineering geologic map is drawn to identify and spatially represent zones of geologic
material that meet similar engineering performance criteria. In some cases, a geomorphic map,
showing landforms, slope stability, and topography is appropriate. The map shows the locations
of all measurements, samples, or observations, as well as the data collected. Supplements may
include structural contour maps showing elevations on geologic contacts, tops of key beds, or
other surfaces of interest; and isopach maps showing contoured thickness of a mapped unit.
Cross-sections, profiles, fence diagrams, columnar sections, perspective drawings, and other
illustrations may be used to represent geologic features.

A geologic evaluation map is a plan view diagram or drawing, representing a given area, depicting
the orientation and location of key geologic and related features that could significantly affect
the performance of a proposed or existing structure or practice. It may include profiles, cross-
sections, or other supplemental figures to help illustrate the information. A geologic
evaluation map is used to support planning documents, such as an environmental assessment or
environmental impact statement.

Maps are prepared on the best available topographic base map or aerial photograph using standard
signs and symbols, at a chosen scale and projection. Plane table, air photo, GPS, and
conventional surveying techniques may be applied to develop a detailed geologic map.

For small structures at low hazard sites, a site sketch is considered adequate. A site sketch is
drawn free-hand from observation or uncontrolled surveys showing only approximate space, scale,
and orientation relationships of the main features of an area.

The accuracy and scale of a map shall be commensurate with the scope of the project and
complexity of the site.

Maps drawn to scale include a graphic scale and a verbal statement using different units such as
1 inch equals 1 mile or a representative fraction such as 1:200. Maps with exaggerated vertical
scales are explained with a verbal statement such as, vertical scale 10x horizontal scale.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-6
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

All maps and sketches shall include a key to symbols used and a north arrow.

531.15 Geologic reports

All geologic reports of investigation are prepared, signed, and dated by the
investigating geologist or person holding the appropriate engineering job-approval
authority for the class of structure, as outlined in 501.04.

The general outline and contents of the report should conform to guidance presented in
ASTM D 420. As a minimum, the report shall include the following headings.

Location of the area investigated. The location is given in terms pertinent to the
project, and may include maps, sketches, and photographs on which test pits, bore
holes, and sample areas are plotted.

Procedures. This section includes a description of the investigating procedures used,

including field and laboratory testing.

Factual findings. Factual findings are clearly separated from interpretations of

results. All borings and test hole logs, graphic presentation of geophysical
measurements, and laboratory test results are presented. Cross sections presented
with basic data from the investigation are limited to the ground surface profile and
factual subsurface data obtained at specific exploration locations. Stratigraphic
units between locations of intrusive locations are indicated on cross sections only if
supported by continuous geophysical profiles. Cross sections that show interpretive
information, such as correlation lines between locations of intrusive explorations,
shall be presented separately from factual findings, and supported by explanatory
notes. Potential contractors shall be provided only with factual findings.

Interpretation of results. This section includes appropriate recommendations and

disclaimers for the use of the report. Recommendations for design parameters are
subject to restrictions imposed by state licensing law, and shall be made only by
professional engineers and geologists specializing in the field of geotechnical
engineering and familiar with the purpose, conditions, and requirements of the study.

Geologic terms and symbols not specifically defined in NRCS literature shall conform
to ASTM D 653, Standard Terminology Relating to Soil, Rock, and Contained Fluids; the
American Geological Institute (AGI) Glossary of Geology; or current AGI Data Sheets.

531.16 Resource planning investigations and reports

In support of the conservation, development, and management of physical natural

resources in Service programs, the NRCS geologist shall be responsible for:
• Providing information pertinent to resource issues of concern such as topography,
soils, erosion, sedimentation, drainage, ground water quality, ground water
quantity, geomorphology, geologic hazards, and mineral resources. Geologic
evaluation maps are prepared as part of the documentation process.
• Determining location, quantity, suitability, and excavation characteristics of
potential sand, gravel, and quarry rock resources within a project area (ASTM D
4992 provides guidance on field examination).
• Cooperating with other technical specialists and planners in locating, mapping,
and documenting undeveloped geologic resources within the project area to avoid
their damage, contamination, and destruction by project activities.
• Assisting in the preparation of the geology sections of soil survey reports. The
geologist supports soil survey activities as explained in 533.22.
• Identifying geologic resources within a project area, including ground water,
building stone, sand and gravel deposits, quarry stone, and related geologic
materials.
• Identifying the potential for geologic attractions that may have scenic,
educational, scientific, or similar intangible values.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-7
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

SUBPART 531B - DAM SITE INVESTIGATIONS

531.20 Classification of dam sites for geologic investigation

To establish criteria for geologic investigation and sampling, dam sites are categorized into two
groups according to the fill height of the structure, construction materials, purpose of
structure, and structure class.

Group I dam sites include:

• All structure class c dams.
• All structure class b dams.
• All structure class a dams with a maximum fill height equal to or greater than 35 feet, as
measured from low point on centerline.
• All structures greater than 20 ft high of the following types: concrete or masonry arch or
gravity dams, drop spillways, box-inlet drop spillways, and chutes.
• All dams with a maximum fill height equal to or greater than 20 feet, as measured from low
point on centerline, where the principal purpose is forming storage reservoirs for
recreation, municipal water supply, or irrigation and where the product of the storage (ac-
ft) times the height (ft) of the dam is equal to or greater than 3,000.

Group II dam sites include all other types of dams that do not classify as Group I, such as
embankment structures of Conservation Practice Standards 378, Pond; Waste Storage Facility, 313;
and Grade Stabilization Structure, 410.

531.21 Requirements for geologic investigation of Group I dam sites

All preliminary, detailed, and construction (as-built) site investigations shall be conducted
under the supervision of a qualified geologist.

A qualified geologist is defined as an individual who meets the minimum requirements for the
practice of geology as defined by the State Board of Registration of the state in which the
individual resides. In the absence of state registration requirements or a state definition of
geologist for the practice of geology, a qualified geologist shall meet the requirements for the
title of Certified Professional Geologist, as defined by the American Institute of Professional
Geologists.

Subsurface exploration shall be of sufficient intensity to determine all conditions that can
influence the design, layout, construction, and functioning of the proposed structure.

Before the investigation is completed, the geologist, the engineer designated for soil mechanics
leadership, and the design engineer shall jointly review the findings of the investigation to
determine the adequacy of the sampling program for testing. The data are reviewed for adequacy
for use in all stages of design and construction.

An engineering geologic map of the site shall be prepared according to 531.14.

All soil and rock units shall be characterized beneath the entire base of the structure and
abutments. For all earth fill dams in Group I, borings at all stations within the footprint of
the structure shall be extended to depths equal to or greater than the equivalent proposed height
of fill associated with the points of boring, or to hard, massive, unaltered rock or similar
limiting layer. Borings shall be extended deep enough into rock to establish whether it is in
situ.

For all concrete dams, borings shall extend to depths equivalent to at least 1.5 times the
proposed effective height of the dam as measured from the maximum proposed depth of excavation.

All geologic materials and features with engineering significance at or near the site are
characterized, documented, and assessed according to current industry standards.
Characterization includes classification and determination of material properties and mass
properties, especially stratigraphic and structural discontinuities, such as faults, joints, and
fractures with engineering significance.

Sufficient borings are made along the proposed centerlines of drop inlets or other conduits to
provide correlation of geologic materials from the riser to the outlet and to a depth equal to
the zone of influence of the structure.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-8
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

Sufficient borings are made along the proposed centerline of dams to provide
correlation of geologic materials and to define the rock surface profile.

At least one bore hole is placed at the riser, at the intersection of the centerlines
of the dam and conduit, and at the outlet.

Delineate the incompressible rock surface where it occurs within the depth of
influence of the structure.

Locate earth material proposed for use as fill and determine its quantity and
engineering suitability using appropriate soil mechanics tests, as needed.

Determine the depth to ground water, seasonal variation of water table, and extent and
character of aquifers within the zone of influence of the structure.

Evaluate the need for controlling ground water during construction and determine the
need for controlling moisture content in borrow material.

Evaluate whether economic mineral deposits, including sand and gravel, occur within
the area of influence, or would be preempted or otherwise impacted by the project.

Evaluate excavation characteristics of materials in proposed open spillway cuts.

Assess the influence of rock mass properties on the slope stability of rock materials
in the spillway cut slopes.

Investigate earth auxiliary spillways according to 531.25 d.

Evaluate the need for hydraulic pressure testing in rock foundations and abutments of
proposed dams for water storage reservoirs.

531.22 Requirements for geologic investigation during construction of all Group I dam
sites.

Requirements for geologic investigation during construction and project

implementation, explained in 531.05, apply to all Group I dam sites.

A geologic investigation is conducted by a geologist during construction of all Group

I dam sites, defined in 531.20. Throughout construction the project engineer shall
notify the geologist as geologic materials become exposed during excavation of
pipeline trenches, structure foundations, core trenches, auxiliary spillway cuts, and
borrow areas. The geologist shall visit the site as often as necessary to assess the
engineering significance of all differing conditions encountered during construction
excavation.

The geologist shall prepare an as-built geologic report. All findings and
interpretations that differ from those reported in previous geologic investigations
shall be identified and explained. Differing conditions with engineering and
geomorphic significance are, to the extent possible, measured and assessed in the
field, and documented in the report. The report shall include logs, cross-sections,
engineering geologic maps, and photographs, as needed, to support the documentation.
Maps and report shall conform to 531.14 and 531.15, respectively. The report is filed
as a supplement to the engineering design folder of the project (explained in 512.52
b).

Documentation includes revising as-built drawings, geologic maps, and structure

sections prepared in earlier investigations. The documentation process may include
photographic or video recordings, hand sketches, or supplemental topographic or GPS
surveys, as appropriate.

531.23 Requirements for geologic investigation of Group II Dam Sites

Requirements for geologic investigation are determined by a person holding the

appropriate job-approval authority for the class of structure, as outlined in 501.04,
and who is trained to recognize geologic hazards. A geologist is consulted in areas
where experience or information is limited, or geologic conditions are complex.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-9
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

531.24 Requirements for logging soil and rock at Group I dam sites

(a) All Group I dam sites for sampling soil and rock at all Group I dam sites:
• Representative samples are obtained for classification purposes of all geologic
materials identified in the foundation, borrow, relief well, principal spillway,
and auxiliary spillway areas.

• Undisturbed samples for shear tests are obtained from all strata of fine grained
soils of questionable stability in the foundation within a depth equivalent to
one-half the maximum fill height of the dam, as measured from low point on
centerline.

(b) All Group I dam sites that have permanent storage. For all Group I dam sites
in which storage other than sediment pool storage is to be incorporated into the
design and in which significant leakage is suspected:
• Samples are obtained of materials underlying the permanent pool area to determine
reservoir sealing requirements.

(c) Structure class a, b, and c dam sites. For all structure class a dam site
that have a maximum fill height equal to or greater than 35 ft, and for all structure
class b and c dam sites:
• Samples for compaction and shear tests are obtained from the borrow areas and
auxiliary spillway areas.
• Undisturbed samples for consolidation tests are obtained of all compressible fine
grained materials from the foundation within a depth equivalent to the maximum
height of the dam (as measured from low point on centerline). If compressible
materials are suspected to occur at greater depths, drilling and sampling of the
compressible materials are conducted to depths within the zone of influence.

(d) Group I dam sites that have a maximum fill height greater than 20 ft
Undisturbed samples for compaction tests are obtained for all materials of
questionable shear strength, such as soft clays and soft silts, in the foundation of
the dam.

(e) Other Group I dam sites for any other type of Group I dam site not listed in
521 (a-d):
• Samples for compaction tests are obtained from borrow and auxiliary spillway areas
if information and experience in the area are inadequate to conclusively predict
the engineering behavior of the materials.

531.25 Requirements for logging soil and rock at Group II dam sites

For all Group II dam sites, samples are not required if adequate information and
experience in the area are available. If such information and experience are
unavailable or if questionable conditions occur, sampling is conducted the same as for
Group I dam sites.

531.26 Conditions that require investigation for all dam sites

A geologic investigation is required if any of the following conditions occur,

regardless of dam site classification. The intensity of investigation explained in
531.01 and detail of the report shall be consistent with the structure class of the
dam, complexity of site geology, and data needed for design.

(a) Seismic Assessment. All dams in seismic zones 3 and 4, Alaska, Puerto Rico,
Virgin Islands, and Hawaii, and all structure class c dams in seismic zone 2 require
special investigations to determine liquefaction potential of cohesionless strata,
including very thin layers, and the presence at the site of any faults determined to
be active in Holocene time. The potential for earthquake induced seiches of the
reservoir pool shall be evaluated. A map shall be prepared indicating the location of
all intensity V or magnitude 4 or greater earthquakes of record, and any historically
active faults within a 100 km (65 mi) radius of the site. The geologic report also
shall summarize any other possible earthquake hazards, such as ground compaction,
landslides, and excessive shaking of unconsolidated materials. For slope stability
analysis, earthquake information, including acceleration, duration, and recurrence
interval, is collected from the US Geological Survey

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-10
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

(USGS internet address is http://www-nmd.usgs.gov). Seismic hazard maps for certain

regions are available in printout form by contacting:

National Geophysical Data Center

NOAA, Mail Code E/GC
325 Broadway,
Boulder, CO 80303
Telephone (303) 497-6215
Internet Address: [email protected]

(b) Subsidence. Assess the potential for ground surface subsidence caused by past
or future extraction of solid minerals or fluids, including ground water and natural
gas.

(c) Collapsible Soils. Evaluate the potential for collapse upon saturation or
wetting of certain unconsolidated materials associated with deposits such as, alluvial
fans, terraces, and eolian materials in arid and semiarid regions. If the potential
exists, investigate and conduct appropriate sampling for laboratory analysis to
provide quantitative information for design and construction.

(d) Earth Spillways. For all Group I dams as defined in 531.20, the geologist
provides specific geologic information to the design engineer for the stability
analysis and integrity analysis of auxiliary spillways, as explained in NEH Part 628,
Chapters 50 (Earth Spillway Design) and 51 (Earth Spillway Erosion Model, SITES
program). All earth materials occurring beneath the spillway down to the elevation of
the flood plain are mapped by the headcut erodibility index according to NEH Part 628,
Chapter 52, Field Procedures Guide for the Headcut Erodibility Index. The
investigation shall be sufficiently detailed to provide all input parameters for the
index, and shall include a plan view map and longitudinal sections. The investigating
geologist and responsible engineer jointly determine the engineering significance of
all material that has a headcut erodibility index less than or equal to 10.

(e) Mass Movements. Assess landslides and landslide potential at dam and
reservoir sites and summarize the history of mass movements in the project area.

(f) Karst Areas. Evaluate limestone, dolomite, gypsum, and other soluble rocks at
dam and reservoir sites for subsidence potential and leakage potential.

(g) Multipurpose Dams. Evaluate the ground water regime and hydraulic
characteristics of the entire reservoir area of water storage dams to determine
leakage potential and the need for reservoir sealing.

(h) Other. Evaluate other geologic conditions or materials that have engineering
significance. These include, but are not limited to, dispersive soil; soil containing
highly soluble sodium salts; expansive soil; gypsiferous soil; soil that has vertic
properties; gap-graded soil, sensitive clay; highly compressible soil; pyritic shale;
fissile shale; stress relief and rebound joints; and shallow artesian ground water.

531.27 Investigation of water storage reservoir sites

Geologic investigation shall be conducted in the proposed reservoir area, abutments,

and embankment foundation to evaluate leakage potential.

Evaluate anticipated changes in the ground water regime with respect to the intended
function of the structure.

Evaluate potential effects, including damages, of seepage from a reservoir on lands

adjacent to or downstream from the structure.

531.28 Dams subject to deep subsidence

Special investigations are required for the planning and design of dams and spillways
subject to deep foundation subsidence that can result from collapse of underground
mines, or extraction of fluids, such as water, oil, and natural gas from beneath the
Earth's surface. The required foundation supports established in this subpart are
essential to the design of safe embankments.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-11
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

This policy applies where foundation subsidence is or could be a threat to the safety
of all structure class b and c dams and all class a dams for which the product of
storage (ac-ft) times effective height (ft) of dam is greater than 3,000.

(a) Geologic formations containing layered mineral deposits

At all dam sites underlain by layered mineral deposits that may be mined in the
future, certain minimum foundation support shall be provided for earth embankments and
associated spillways. Provision for such support may be accomplished through fee
simple title or subordination agreements that insure the legal right to:
• Prevent the development or removal of such minerals from unmined areas that would
cause subsidence of the structure, or
• Preserve or build and maintain adequate support to ensure against future
subsidence of the structure foundation for mined areas.

At the ground surface, surface and subsurface landrights shall encompass an area that
extends outward beyond the base of the dam a horizontal distance equivalent to the
depth of the deepest mineral deposit below ground surface. This requirement may be
modified as a result of a detailed site specific study by, and at the consequent
recommendation of, a qualified consulting mining engineer.

Fee simple title or subordination agreements may or may not be required for the area
of the reservoir upstream of the dam that is beyond the area required for the
stability of the dam. The need for the legal right to control the mining of the
reservoir area depends on the following types of evaluation:

• An evaluation by the sponsors or owners of their possible liability for damage to:
- the mine or mining operation caused by flooding, increased pumping costs, a
reduction in amount of the mineral that can be removed, or other possible
damage; or
- surface areas and improvements on the periphery of the reservoir that may
subside and thereby suffer increased damage, such as, from inundation or
increased flood flow in inlet channels.

If any of the problems listed above occur, NRCS will advise the sponsors or owners in
writing to:
• Seek legal counsel and a qualified mining engineer to help determine the extent of
the risk the sponsors or owners should assume;
• Consider purchasing necessary landrights to protect against possible damage suits;
• Consider the feasibility of taking easements to an elevation higher than normal by
an amount equal to or greater than the anticipated subsidence. NRCS shall make
available to the sponsors or owners all of its data pertinent to the subsidence
problem and the proposed dam.

(b) Geologic formations containing fluids

During the planning phase of projects involving dams to be designed and constructed
under NRCS programs, a geologist shall determine whether removal of fluids such as
petroleum, water, and natural gas could impact the design, function, and safety of the
dams, particularly by abrupt differential settlement. The geologist shall provide
recommendations to the design engineer on identified geologic concerns that need to be
addressed in the operations and management plan for the structure. Subordination of
mineral rights within a limited area at the site does not necessarily prevent
subsidence of the structure.

If studies indicate that the predicted subsidence cannot be remedied, the site shall
be abandoned.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-12
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

SUBPART C - HYDROGEOLOGIC INVESTIGATIONS

531.30 General

Appropriate consideration of project hydrogeology is essential in the conservation

planning, development, operation, and maintenance phases of many NRCS programs.
Investigations for the development of ground water resources, the management of ground
water quality, and engineering control or management of underground water are
conducted under the supervision of the NRCS geologist and coordinated with other
disciplines, as appropriate. Depending on the needed intensity of investigation and
complexity of the site, there are conditions, as defined in this policy, under which
it is appropriate for a person holding appropriate engineering job-approval authority
for the class of structure, as explained in 501.4, to conduct site investigations.

531.31 Investigations for ground water resources development

Technical guidance for ground water development is contained in NEH 18, Ground Water;
NEH 631.33, Investigations for Ground Water Resources Development; EFH, Chapter 12,
Springs and Wells, Ground Water Manual (Bureau of Reclamation, 2nd ed., 1995). Other
methods not described in these references may be considered at the discretion of the
investigating geologist.

The NRCS geologist has responsibility for the following types of investigations and
evaluations:
• Evaluating ground water development potential of aquifers.
• Conducting ground water budget analyses in watersheds and evaluating ground water
overdraft potential.
• Evaluating ground water quantity, quality, and geologic factors that influence
design and construction of production wells, and well head protection measures.
• Estimating ground water consumption or demand in watersheds.
• Evaluating potential for underground disposal of surface waters.
• Evaluating potential for conjunctive use of ground water with surface water
supplies.
• Determining aquifer boundary conditions and potential for well interference.
• Determining aquifer recharge potential.

531.32 Investigations for ground water quality management

Guidance on ground water quality investigations is in NEH 651, Agricultural Waste

Management Field Handbook.

The NRCS geologist has responsibility for the following types of investigations and
evaluations to provide sufficient information for planning or design:
• Aquifer restoration or enhancement.
• Location, construction, rehabilitation, decommissioning, and problem
investigations of water wells.
• Ground water pollution potential relative to agricultural point and nonpoint
sources.
• Potential for ground water pollution by components of agricultural waste
management systems.
• Influence of karst terrace on construction and performance of conservation
practices and structures.
• Well head protection zones.
• Areas having ground water recharge potential.
• Location of ground water divides and delimiting recharge areas in karst terrane
and other highly pervious geologic materials.
• Saline seeps.
• Saltwater intrusion.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-13
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

531.33 Ground water investigations for conservation engineering

The NRCS person holding the appropriate engineering job-approval authority for the
class of structure, as outlined in 501.04, is responsible for conducting the following
types of investigations and evaluations to provide sufficient information in the
planning or design phases of a project:
• Investigations for controlling the water table with respect to:
- agricultural drainage and irrigation water management activities;
- engineering drainage for excavation de-watering of foundations, borrow areas,
quarries, buildings, and mines;
- seepage evaluations for blankets, drains, filters, and grouting;
- engineering subdrainage for slope stability.

Technical guidance for investigation of the water table are in EFM Chapter 14,
Drainage; NEH 16, Drainage.

A geologist is responsible for:

• Evaluating engineering performance of conservation practices or components by
employing ground water quality monitoring, sampling, and testing methods,
practices, or geophysical techniques according to current standards in:
- ASTM, Section 04, Construction, Volumes 04.08 and 04.09 on Soil and Rock;
- ASTM, Section 11, Water and Environmental Technology, Volumes 11.01 and 11.02 on
Water.
• Investigations for the treatment or remediation of sinkholes and other karst
• features.
• Evaluating ground subsidence associated with ground water withdrawal.

SUBPART 531D – GEOMORPHIC, EROSION, AND SEDIMENTATION INVESTIGATIONS

531.40 General

Appropriate consideration of geomorphic processes, including sediment production,

transport, and deposition, is essential to sound natural resources conservation
planning and engineering. It also is essential to the proper installation and
performance of many conservation practices and structures. The effects of natural and
anthropogenic sources of erosion and sedimentation, both onsite and offsite, are
assessed in all NRCS programs. Geomorphic processes and their impacts on resource
conservation activities that are assessed by the geologist include, but are not
limited to:
• Sediment storage design for reservoirs and ponds
• Sediment yield and sediment budgets of watersheds
• Reservoir sedimentation
• Surface water quality degradation by sediment
• Structural deficiencies caused by sedimentation and erosion
• Stream channel and stream corridor function including erosion and deposition
• Evaluation of rock for erosion control.

531.41 Responsibility for erosion and sedimentation investigations

The state conservationist is responsible for ensuring that interdisciplinary study

teams include specialists for the geomorphic issues under consideration.

A qualified geologist is responsible for the survey, and analysis and interpretation
of data related to geomorphic processes. These processes include detachment,
transport, deposition, consolidation, cementation, and lithification of soil and rock
particles.

Because of the complexity of geomorphic processes, particularly those pertaining to

sedimentation and erosion, many modern field procedures and predictive

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-14
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

models are still under development or refinement. Sound technical judgment,

therefore, is requisite in the consideration of process relationships, the selection
of field techniques to be used in studies, and the formulation of hypotheses.

The NRCS geologist shall, in collaboration with related technical specialists, develop
supplemental guidelines and geomorphology field procedures consistent with the state’s
needs, as determined by the state conservation engineer.

531.42 Sediment storage design for reservoirs and ponds

Design criteria for the allocation of sediment storage in all reservoirs impounded by
Group I dams as defined in 531.20, shall be determined by a geologist. For Group II
sites, the determinations may be made by others who have been trained by a qualified
geologist in recognizing and evaluating the effects of sedimentation on pond
performance. A specialist with expertise in sedimentation is consulted for Group II
dams with complex sedimentation problems or for Group II sites where data are to be
applied to another area or site.

Methods to be used are provided in NEH-3, Ch. 8, Sediment --Storage Design and
Criteria. These methods include the gross erosion/sediment delivery ratio,
measurement of sediment in similar ponds and reservoirs, suspended load records of
gauged streams, and direct predictive equations. Other methods not described in NEH-3
may be considered at the discretion of the investigating geologist.

Reservoir trap efficiency is calculated using procedures outlined in NEH-3, Ch. 8.

Other methods not described in NEH-3 may be considered at the discretion of the
investigating geologist.

531.43 Watershed sediment yield studies

Watershed sediment yield and sediment budget studies are conducted to evaluate the
effectiveness of land treatment and structural measures in reducing erosion and
sediment yield in the treated area. They also are conducted to provide basic data for
planning and design of soil and water conservation measures.

Methods for determining watershed sediment yield are provided in NEH-3, Ch. 8. Other
methods not described in NEH-3 may be considered at the discretion of the
investigating geologist.

531.44 Reservoir sedimentation surveys

Reservoir sedimentation surveys are conducted on selected reservoirs for specific

purposes determined by the state conservation engineer.

Sedimentation surveys for Conservation Practice Standard 378, Pond, are conducted by
personnel trained in sedimentation surveys. Sedimentation surveys for Conservation
Practice Standard 402, Dams, are conducted by a geologist.

Sedimentation surveys conform to procedures in NEH-3, Chapter 7, Field Investigations

and Surveys. Other proven methods are used at the discretion of the investigating
geologist. The data collection format conforms to ASTM D 4581, Standard Guide for
Measurement of Morphologic Characteristics of Surface Water Bodies.

Reports for each reservoir sedimentation survey are prepared according to requirements
in NEH-3, Chapter 7, and are filed at the state office with a copy sent to the
Director, CED.

The report includes data on watershed conditions that affect sediment yield, for
examples, soils, surface geology, topography and land forms, land use and treatment,
and all types of significant erosion. The report includes information about land use
management changes through time in the contributing watershed.

The state conservation engineer is responsible for the technical adequacy of the
report.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-15
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

531.45 Sedimentation investigations related to quality of surface waters

A qualified geologist is responsible for the development of sediment budgets that identify
sources and sinks and allocate sediment by sources. Sediment budgets identify sediment particle
size ranges by source. Problem identification is specific as to the sediment particle sizes
causing problems.

Water quality standards as they pertain to turbidity have been established by the states for
interstate and coastal waters under provisions of the Water Quality Act of 1965.

Related policy on sedimentation as it pertains to surface water quality is contained in USDA

nonpoint source water quality policy, Department Regulation 9500-7 (460-GM, Apr. 1987).

Guidelines and standards for investigating, analyzing, and evaluating sediment as related to
quality of surface waters are provided in consensus industry sources, including:

• National Handbook of Recommended Methods for Water-data Acquisition, and

• ASTM, Section 11--Water and Environmental Technology, Volumes 11.01 and 11.02 on Water.

Other pollutants associated with sediment-related water quality are investigated, analyzed, and
evaluated by a specialist that has appropriate expertise.

The state conservation engineer collaborates with other technical disciplines and is responsible
for developing supplemental guidelines and field procedures consistent with program needs of the
state.

531.46 Investigation of structural problems caused by sedimentation or erosion

Policy contained in 504, Subpart A provides requirements for investigation of structural problems
caused by sedimentation and erosion, and provides for committee assignments; procedures; and
engineering reports.

If sediment accumulation in a pond, reservoir, or other sediment retaining structure appears to

significantly exceed the design rate and may result in functional limitation during its design
life, a sedimentation investigation is conducted at the discretion of the state conservation
engineer. The investigation addresses the extent of the problem and causes of the increased
sedimentation rate, and outlines possible solutions.

A sedimentation study is part of investigations made of structural problems caused wholly, or in

part, by channel instability as presented in 531.47.

531.47 Geologic investigation of sedimentation and erosion processes in the stream channel and
stream corridor

Geologic investigations may include analyzing sediment transport capacity of the channel,
determining change in transport capacity caused by the planned modification, and determining
bedload sediment sources. Stream channel investigations may consider the dimension, pattern,
profile and other pertinent geomorphic factors of the stream, as well as activities in the
watershed that can affect sediment supply and subsequent stream channel behavior and stability.

Investigations are conducted under the supervision of a qualified geologist. Investigations

consist of logging, mapping, sampling, testing, and analysis of bed and bank material, and
collection of specific fluvial geomorphic data according to policy contained in Subpart A -
Geologic Investigations.

Intensity of investigation shall conform to policy outlined in 531.01. Stream channel

classification, analyses, and interpretations for predicting the behavior of the channel and
riparian area that have alternative designs take into full consideration fundamental principles
and modern theories of fluvial geomorphology. Recommendations for design give full consideration
to channel stability concepts for natural streams that allow a stream to develop a dimension,
pattern, and profile that will be in dynamic equilibrium over the life of the project.

Technical guidance is contained in NEH Part 653, Stream Corridor Restoration Handbook; EFH,
Chapter 16, Streambank and Shoreline Protection; and NEH-3, Sedimentation.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-16
 PART 531 - GEOLOGY

531.48 Evaluation of rock for erosion control

Rock material is commonly used in erosion control applications as filter bedding

stone, riprap stone, armor stone, and breakwater stone, and in groin and gabion
structures.

The intensity of evaluation of rock material to be used for erosion control depends
on the size and design requirements of the individual project, the quantity and
quality of rock required, and the potential risk for property damage or loss of human
life.

The acceptability of an identified source of rock material may be based on experience

and previous performance of use for similar applications under comparable performance
conditions.

The assessment of questionable sources of rock to be used for erosion control is

conducted according to ASTM D 4992, Standard Practice for Evaluation of Rock to Be
Used for Erosion Control and other related ASTM standards.

531.49 Special erosion and sedimentation studies

A geologist or other appropriate technical specialist is consulted for certain events

that typically occur infrequently and that may present either opportunities or
problems associated with, but not necessarily limited to, physical damages caused by
erosion and sedimentation on coastal, estuarine, flood plain, and wetland areas, and
reservoir rehabilitation or decommissioning. They may be associated with wind action,
surface and underground mining, irrigation, and gullies, including ephemeral gullies.
Damages may be related to sediment intrusion into fish-spawning gravel beds. Damages
may occur in urban and rural areas due to uncontrolled storm water runoff from
recently burned wildfire areas.

Special erosion and sedimentation studies are conducted according to policy contained
in Subpart A - Geologic Investigations.

(210 - V-NEM, November, 1999)

531-17
 PART 532 - BIOLOGICAL AND AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING

532.00 General.

Biological and agricultural engineering is the application of

physical, ecological, and biological sciences to develop
engineering solutions that conserve, improve and sustain the
environment and natural resources. Biological and agricultural
engineering combines conventional engineering principles and
design with the applied biological sciences. The purpose of
biological and agricultural engineering is to develop engineering
solutions that recognize and address the natural processes
occurring due to biological organisms and their surroundings.
The designer will consider the effect of the proposed solution on
plants, animals and other biological organisms as well as
assessing how the organisms will impact the effectiveness of the
engineering solution.

NRCS engineering assistance can result in both temporary and

permanent changes to the ecological resource on millions of
acres. The application of biological and agricultural
engineering to these changes will result in changes that are more
harmonious with the natural ecosystem.

The basic principles of biological and agricultural

engineering are to be applied as an integral part of engineering
work. They must be considered early in planning and continued
through design, construction, operation and maintenance as
necessary to insure appropriate, functional, and efficient
results.

532.01 NRCS Biological and Agricultural engineering assistance.

NRCS will provide technical assistance that includes the basic

principles of biological and agricultural engineering. NRCS is
to provide technical information, guidelines, and standards
together with planning and design assistance to ensure that
proposed solutions conserve, improve and sustain air, plant,
animal, soil, and water resources. Appropriate specialists such
as biologists, biological engineers, microbiologists and organic
chemists may be involved, as necessary, to resolve anticipated
interactions with biological organisms. Assistance shall be

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

532-1
 PART 532 - BIOLOGICAL AND AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING

provided in conformance with the National Conservation Planning

Handbook, Field Office Technical Guide and provisions of the
General Manual.

Biological and agricultural engineering principles, as

appropriate, will be included in new or revised NRCS practice
standards and conservation practice physical effects. The
agricultural engineer on the national conservation engineering
division staff will provide guidance and leadership in biological
and agricultural engineering. Each state shall assign leadership
in biological and agricultural engineering to an engineer trained
in the basic biological and agricultural engineering principles.
Biological and agricultural engineering will be incorporated into
planning, design, layout and construction training.

532.02 Non-NRCS Biological and Agricultural engineering

services.

The services of other Government agencies, educational

institutions, and private firms or other qualified individuals
can be included for planning, design, and supervision of
construction.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 24, December 1997)

532-2
 PART 533 – SOIL ENGINEERING

SUBPART A - ENGINEERING CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS

533.00 General

(a) Soils are used as construction materials and foundations

for engineering structures. The wide range of soil properties
and conditions affect their performance and use.

(b) An engineering soil classification system indicates

engineering soil properties and provides a preliminary
understanding of the behavior of soils under various engineering
conditions. It is used to communicate this information in
simple notations and brief descriptions. Soil engineers and
geologists, for example, frequently communicate this
information. Soil engineers perform soil testing programs,
engineering designs, and soil engineering related construction
activities. Geologists perform site investigations to gather
information on soil properties and conditions to be used by soil
engineers.

533.01 Scope

This policy establishes the soil classification systems that

will be used in NRCS engineering activities, including the
engineering sections of soil survey reports.

533.02 Soil classification systems

(a) The Unified Soil Classification System (USCS), is to be

used in NRCS engineering activities. The Unified System is the
standard accepted by the American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM), Designation D2487: Classification of Soils for
Engineering Purposes; and Designation D2488: Description and
Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure).

(b) The USDA National System of Soil Classification (Soil

Taxonomy) is the pedological classification used in the National

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

533-1
 PART 533 – SOIL ENGINEERING

Cooperative Soil Survey. Additional information can be obtained

from the National Soil Survey Handbook. The engineering
sections of soil survey reports include both the USDA and the
USCS soil classification systems.

(c) Soil classes determined by the Unified Soil

Classification System and the USDA textural classes in the
pedological system provide information on the nature and size of
soil particles. If the full combination of characteristics
denoted by pedological soil names is used, additional
information such as natural drainage condition can also be
deduced. Soil surveys show the location and extent of different
soils; however, site specific identification or classification
determined by soil testing is needed for designing engineering
structures. Soil classification for engineering uses is best
interpreted by the Unified Soil Classification System.

(d) Data contained in available soil survey reports can be

used and should be supplemented as necessary to classify soils
at specific sites. For some small farm-type structures, soil
survey information properly interpreted may provide much of the
soil information needed for planning and installation.

(e) All engineers and geologists shall be trained to use

both the Unified and the USDA textural systems with competence.
Construction inspectors, engineering and physical science
technicians, and conservation technicians shall also be trained
in these soil classification systems needed for planning,
design, and installation of conservation practices.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

533-2
 PART 533 – SOIL ENGINEERING

SUBPART B - OPERATIONS

533.10 General

(a) Soil mechanics is that part of physical science which

deals with the action of forces on soil bodies. These actions
are usually measured in testing laboratories. Soil engineering
is the practice of engineering which involves the action of
forces on soil masses.

(b) Collection and analysis of soil engineering data are

essential in the investigation and design of engineering
structures. The examination and verification of soil properties
during construction are also critical. Special training and
experience usually are needed because many factors depend on
interpretation and judgment. Close coordination is needed
between the investigation, soil testing, design, and
construction functions.

(c) Soil mechanics testing provides data for evaluating soil

and rock as engineering materials for planning, design, and
construction. Test results identify the index, chemical, and
engineering properties used in the analyses and design of
foundations and earth or earth-supported structures.

§533.11 Data collection

(a) The state conservation engineer is responsible for all

site investigations and the collection of samples. The
engineering staff or team that prepares the final design shall
assist in planning the site investigation, sample selection, and
final testing program.

(b) All data needed for analyzing soil conditions pertinent

to planning, designing, and constructing engineering structures
shall be obtained for each phase. Field tests and
interpretation procedures in Part 531, Subpart A, are to be used
to determine as many in situ soil properties as practical. If
further testing is needed or verification of field conditions is
in order, appropriate representative samples shall be obtained
for laboratory testing.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

533-3
 PART 533 – SOIL ENGINEERING

(c) Before completion of the geologic investigation, the

geologist, the engineer designated for soils mechanics
leadership, and/or the project engineer shall jointly review the
results of the investigation and the adequacy of sampling for
testing. The data shall be examined to determine that it is
adequate to be used for all stages of design and construction.

§533.12 Testing

(a) Soil mechanics testing shall conform to established NRCS

standards and procedures. The testing shall be completed at
appropriate times during the investigation, design, and
construction phases. To facilitate field investigations and
construction operations, index and chemical tests may be
performed in either local NRCS or commercial facilities.
Laboratory tests for engineering properties (shear,
consolidation, permeability, etc.) shall be performed in
laboratories supervised by engineers with soil engineering
expertise.

(b) For designs prepared through engineering services

contracts, the testing may be performed as a phase of the total
design contract. (See Part 505.) Soil mechanics testing
facilities may also use engineering services contracts with
commercial geotechnical facilities to supplement their own
forces, redistribute peak workloads, and provide more efficient
operation. Testing by non-NRCS facilities shall be reviewed and
checked for accuracy and proper procedures by NRCS engineers
with soil engineering expertise.

(c) NRCS soil mechanics testing services are provided

through the National Soil Mechanics Center (NSMC) in Lincoln,
Nebraska. The center has two testing laboratories available to
perform the testing services: the laboratory at the center in
Lincoln, Nebraska, to serve the West, Northern Plains, Midwest,
and East Regions; and a satellite laboratory in Fort Worth,
Texas, to serve the Southeast and South Central Regions.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

533-4
 PART 533 – SOIL ENGINEERING

(d) Both facilities have the equipment and personnel to run

all tests routinely required for NRCS work. The testing
laboratories assist each other by providing testing services
during peak workload periods, when special testing is required,
and other activities as their resources permit.

(e) NRCS laboratory testing will be accomplished on a first-

come-first-served basis. Testing services may be requested by
letter, fax, or electronic mail. The request shall include name
and address of sender, name of site or project, financial
project code, name of watershed or location, type of project and
brief description, list of samples and type (disturbed or
undisturbed), hazard class (for dams), testing requested, and
any other pertinent information. States are not charged
directly for testing services or assistance.

(f) If the NSMC is to perform engineering analyses, samples

submitted shall be accompanied by geologic and engineering
reports commensurate with the complexity of the structure. The
reports shall be submitted to the head of the testing laboratory
by the state conservation engineer, or others with delegated
authority from the state conservation engineer.

(g) The engineering report shall include the preliminary

design and other information required for setting up a testing
program, establishing testing pressures, rates, and other
details for completing soil tests. The report shall also
explain the purpose for which samples were obtained, the
potential use of the soil represented by the samples, and the
expected use for the test results.

(h) The state conservation engineer shall maintain close

contact with the testing facility on needed changes in the
testing program as it progresses. On jobs requiring design
assistance from other engineering staffs or teams, the state
conservation engineer will keep that staff informed of any
proposed changes in the testing.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

533-5
 PART 533 – SOIL ENGINEERING

(i) A report from the testing facility is to be submitted to

the state conservation engineer and shall include all requested
test data with a narrative giving details of the testing work,
soil classifications, descriptions of soils, condition of
samples, and observed test performances.

(j) Soil mechanics testing standards shall be established by

the Director of the Conservation Engineering Division.
Inspection of NRCS soil mechanics testing facilities that are
national, regional, or multistate in scope shall be under the
direction of the Director of the Conservation Engineering
Division. The Director of the National Soil Mechanics Center
shall direct the inspection of state soil mechanics testing
facilities and other soil mechanics testing facilities under
contract or agreement with NRCS.

(k) NRCS soil mechanics testing facilities that receive soil

samples from areas where quarantine regulations are imposed,
shall obtain the requirements from the Animal and Plant Health
Inspection Service (APHIS), USDA, for receiving and disposing of
soil samples. Each facility shall obtain a permit for receiving
these samples. Requirements for taking and shipping samples
under quarantine regulations are included in Part 531, Subpart
F.

§533.13 Soil engineering analyses

(a) Soil engineering analyses shall be made by the engineer

closest to the field who has the necessary expertise and
training. If possible, this work is done concurrently with
other design work. One staff engineer shall be designated to
provide soil engineering leadership in each state that has
significant earth dam or other activity requiring soil
engineering expertise. This engineer shall be trained in soil
engineering principles. Engineers with specialized training and
broad experience are usually required to make judgments and
analyses for structures that require extensive soil engineering
expertise, such as large earth dams and foundations with complex
conditions. States that do not have the necessary expertise can
obtain this assistance from another state within their region, a
multistate design

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

533-6
 PART 533 – SOIL ENGINEERING

staff, or an outside source. If this expertise is not available

within their region, the state conservation engineer can make
arrangements for assistance from the National Soil Mechanics
Center.

(b) Each state conservation engineer shall evaluate workload

and staff capabilities with regard to soil engineering expertise
and develop an operational plan that defines the scope of
assistance or staffing needed and the training required.

(c) If soil engineering analyses by the National Soil

Mechanics Center are requested in conjunction with the soil
mechanics testing, the state conservation engineer will arrange
for the assistance and analyses. (See Part §533.13(a)) The
engineer responsible for the analyses shall participate in the
soil engineering phases of investigation, soil testing, design,
and soil related problems during construction.

(d) The soils engineering analyses report shall be provided

to the state conservation engineer documenting site conditions,
preliminary design assumptions, engineering properties of soils
used in the analyses, and other factors pertinent to the design
and construction of the works of improvement. Appropriate
recommendations for design features shall be included.

(e) If site investigations, sampling, testing, or soil

engineering analyses are carried out by local sponsoring
agencies or consultants, the state conservation engineer shall
see that the work is reviewed by NRCS personnel that have the
necessary expertise. States that regularly request soil
engineering assistance from another state on designs completed
by in-state NRCS personnel, shall also obtain that state's
assistance on preparing contracts and reviewing soil engineering
work completed by local sponsoring agencies or consultants.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

533-7
 PART 533 – SOIL ENGINEERING

533.14 National benefit activities

(a) The National Soil Mechanics Center provides assistance

to the Conservation Engineering Division for a variety of
activities of National Benefit, including the following:

(1) Training engineers and geologists in soil mechanics.

This includes short-term staff position assignments.

(2) Developing or refining new or specialized testing

techniques and equipment.

(3) Developing technical references in soil mechanics.

(4) Maintaining a testing data base and preparing

correlations for design reference.

(5) Laboratory testing for correlation of test results.

(6) Investigating behavior and performance of soil as

related to engineering use.

(b) The Director of the Conservation Engineering Division

and the Director of the National Soil Mechanics Center will
jointly develop annual and long-range plans of the kinds of
activities that can be accomplished, as work force resources
permit, and the priorities of national benefit work.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

533-8
 PART 533 – SOIL ENGINEERING

SUBPART C - ENGINEERING INTERPRETATIONS OF SOIL SURVEYS

533.20 General

Soil scientists have been assigned leadership for seeing that

engineering interpretations are made and for completing the
engineering sections of soil survey reports and other forms or
documents in connection with the National Cooperative Soil
Survey. These interpretations, reports, and narrative sections
shall be made by or with the assistance of technical staff
personnel.

533.21 Scope

(a) This policy establishes the role of engineers and

engineering geologists in soil survey activities.

(b) The policies, guidelines, and procedures relating to

soil survey work are in GM 430-402.

533.22 Engineering responsibilities

(a) Engineers and geologists are to assist in soil survey

engineering interpretations. They are to participate fully in
decisions on the following:

(1) Whether engineering interpretations are to be made

for a given use.

(2) Criteria and guides for making soil engineering

interpretations for specific uses.

(3) The quality of soil engineering interpretations for

published soil surveys, special reports, or special planning
efforts.

(4) The method of presentation of data dealing with

interpretations and narrative reports on engineering uses of
soil.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

533-9
 PART 533 – SOIL ENGINEERING

(5) Training of soil scientists and engineers to make

engineering interpretations.

(b) Engineers and geologists shall participate in making

soil potential ratings. They shall assist in determining
realistic corrective measures, costs, and continuing limitations
for agricultural uses that require engineering practices. For
nonagricultural uses, experts from outside NRCS shall be invited
to participate in determining corrective measures, costs, and
continuing limitations with final acceptance by NRCS engineers.
Engineers are to determine if adequate data are being used to
determine soil potential ratings. If certain soils are not
normally used for the purpose being rated, the outside experts
may need to complete more investigations and engineering testing
to determine the types of corrective measures that are
appropriate. NRCS engineers and geologists shall act as
advisors to personnel responsible for providing leadership in
making soil potential ratings. In this advisory capacity, they
shall assist in the work, make recommendations, and point out
deficiencies or incorrect procedures.

(c) National office personnel from the Conservation

Engineering Division and Soil Survey Division shall work jointly
to develop guidelines and criteria for soil survey work that
requires engineering interpretations. All engineering
interpretation work for soil surveys shall be prepared in
accordance with established guidelines and criteria.

(d) The state conservation engineer is responsible for

providing assistance in engineering interpretation work for soil
survey activities in the State and shall work closely with the
responsible soil scientist. This authority may be delegated to
a staff engineer who has been assigned leadership in soil
engineering, or to a geologist or field engineer, with
sufficient training and experience.

(e) Engineers and geologists are expected to keep themselves

informed on the development and use of engineering
interpretations for soil surveys. Engineering training programs
shall include appropriate instruction.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

533-10
 PART 534 – HYDRAULICS

(Reserved.)

(210-V-(NEM), July 1980)

534-1
 PART 535 - LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE

535.00 General.

(a) SCS work results in apparent and permanent changes to the

landscape resource on millions of acres. The majority of these
changes are beneficial, but some changes have occurred without
consideration of all landscape resources, especially the visual
resource. On a national scale, the public need for conservation
of landscape resources becomes more important as development,
population, and management pressures increase. In recent years,
legislation has recognized the public need for landscape resource
conservation. The National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, the
Soil and Water Resources Conservation Act of 1977, and the
Surface Mining Control and Reclamation Act of 1977 require SCS to
consider landscape resources.

(b) SCS policy is to maintain or enhance the landscape

resource, abide by legislative intent, and meet the public need.
This commitment is accomplished by maintaining leadership in
conservation Technology and dealing with landscape resources in
all conservation activities.

(c) The objective of landscape architecture is to provide the

technical procedures, training guidance, and management tools to
conserve or rehabilitate the landscape resource in all programs,
project, and activities through conservation technical
assistance.

(d) The basic principles of landscape architecture are to be

applied as an integral part of all engineering work. They must
be considered early in planning and continued through design,
construction, operation, and maintenance to ensure safe,
appropriate, functional, and efficient results.

535.01 Definitions.

Ecological resource. The function of the landscape in

sustaining life-cycle processes.

Landscape architecture. The art and science of planning and

designing the landscape for purposeful human use and the
conservation of landscape resources. Landscape architecture
considers the landscape resource as a composite of its
ecological, social, and visual resources.

Social resource. The use of the landscape for economic,

functional, and cultural purposes.

Visual resource. The classifiable appearance of a landscape

unit.

(210-V-NEM, Amend, 6, August 1984)

535-1
 PART 535 - LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE

535.02 Services.

(a) Landscape resources factors are to receive equal

consideration with other factors in conservation work.

(b) The need for landscape architectural services is to be

determined according to Technical Release No. 65, "Procedure To
Establish Priorities in Landscape Architecture."

(c) SCS landscape architects or the landscape architectural

services of private firms or individuals are to be used for both
planning and design. Sponsors and governmental or educational
institutions may also
be used.

(d) An initial planning phase of landscape architectural

investigation (see Technical Release No. 65) is to be made on all
conservation work to determine priorities and the need for
further investigations.

(e) Detailed investigations may be necessary. Procedures for

making detailed landscape architectural investigations are being
developed; meanwhile, guidance is to be provided by the NTC
landscape architect.

(f) Landscape architectural site investigations for channel

design are to conform to the procedures cited in Technical
Release No. 25, Chapters 1 and 2.

(g) Other inventories, investigations, and studies of the

landscape resource may be required in special situations.
Guidance for these special studies is to be provided by the
National Landscape Architect.

(h) Landscape resource objectives are to be established in

planning and developed during design. Procedures for
establishing these objectives are being developed; meanwhile, the
NTC is to provide guidance in these activities.

535.03 Technical quality.

(a) To advance professional growth and maintain technical

competence, SCS landscape architects are encouraged to become
registered, to maintain liaisons with universities and
professional societies, and to enroll in continuing technical
education if feasible.

(b) The quality standard for landscape architecture used in

technical training and materials is to:

(1) Include a full range of landscape architectural

expertise, not only on the visual resources.

(210-V-NEM, Amend, 6, August 1984)

535-2
 PART 535 - LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE

(2) Be determined by established landscape architectural

principles and meet established landscape resource objectives.

(3) Be according to the best available research.

(4) Be flexible so that it can be modified according to

new experience and research.

(5) State clearly the scale and type of landscape

designated for application by the defined technique.

(6) Be workable in field situations.

(7) Be understandable by field staffs.

(8) Demonstrate quality that is as good as or better than

the standard achievable by the profession as a whole.

(210-V-NEM, Amend, 6, August 1984)

535-3
 PART 536 – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

536.00 General.

(a) Technical assistance is provided in a variety of

applications, but the structural features used are often
repetitive and serve similar hydraulic purpose. The size range
of the structural components frequently used is limited.

(b) Developing a series of construction drawings for structural

components frequently used is an efficient way of providing
technical assistance. The use of standard detail drawings based
on conservative design assumptions to permit adapting to widely
varying site conditions does not usually affect the total
construction cost significantly.

(c) Standards of quality for engineering structures are

established in structural detail drawings for construction plans.
One of the ways the general quality of SCS construction can be
maintained in a uniform manner and at an acceptable level is
through the development and use of standard detail drawings.

536.01 Standard detail drawings.

(a) Standard detail drawings are detailed construction drawings

according to standardized design assumptions. The design
assumptions are to be selected so that the design and detail
drawings for structures, spillways, and appurtenances will
provide for the requirements of many sites.

(b) Standard detail drawings are essentially complete and are

to be used directly in preparing construction drawings for
contract purposes. They are to be complete in construction or
fabrication detail.

(c) The structures in the drawings are to be designed to

perform satisfactorily within the range of conditions assumed in
their development. The assumed range of conditions is to be
indicated in reference drawings, technical releases, or design
notes. Include design assumptions and notes on material quality
on the drawings.

(d) Portions of the drawings may provide for changes in size or

length and thus require some additions for completion. These
changes are not to affect the performance capability of the
structure and are to be considered in the design. The provisions
for these adaptations are to be incorporated into the drawings to
facilitate their use. By including provisions for such
adaptations, the coverage of a range of sizes may be completed
with fewer drawings.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 3, May 1982)

536-1
 PART 536 – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

(e) Standards for reinforced-concrete drop-inlet spillway are

to be consistent with Drawings Nos. ES-150, -151, -152, -154, -
155, and -156.

(f) Each standard detail drawing is to be supported by design

notes, computations, drawings, sketches, and other data. It is
to be recorded and organized in a folder in a manner that allows
reproduction and incorporation into a design folder (511.10 and
511.11(a)of this manual) for the entire job.

536.02 Use of standard detail drawings.

(a) Standard detail drawings are to be used when appropriate

during the development of construction plans. The designer
analyzes the site conditions, structure function, and hydraulic
and structural requirements; examines the applicability of a
standard detail drawing; and includes in the design notes the
verification for the selection of a standard detail drawing or,
if conditions differ significantly, the need for a special
design.

(b) The approving engineer is to determine the appropriate use

of standard detail drawings by considering:

(1) Acceptability of performance;

(2) Overall efficiency of design preparation and installation

costs; and

(3) Risk of making errors during extensive modifications.

(c) Standard detail drawings are not to be developed by the

state office or NTC if the drawings are available at the NTC or
national level, respectively, for the same size and kind of
structure, component, or appurtenance.

536.03 Adaptation of standard detail drawings.

(a) It is sometimes necessary to make additions to standard

detail drawings by including reference-drawing numbers, notes, or
details to minimize construction error. These additions usually
should not affect the hydraulic or structural performance as
originally designed.

(b) If an adaptation of the standard detail drawing affects the

hydraulic or structural performance of the original design,
document the effects if the adaptation by amending the original
design notes and computation from the drawing and incorporating
the amendments into the design folder for the entire job. This
documentation is to include the new or differing design
assumptions, the adaptations and modifications, the effect of the
modification on the original design assumptions, and the analysis
and design of the structure to insure adequate performance.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 3, May 1982)

536-2
 PART 536 – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

536.04 Revision of standard detail drawings.

Standard detail drawings need periodic review and revision to

meet current design needs and to be compatible with current
construction practices. The use of the drawings provides for
such a review. Identified errors and suggestions for improvement
are to be forwarded to the office responsible for preparing the
drawing.

536.05 Availability of standard detail drawings to the public.

(a) Requirements of the Freedom of Information Act make copies

of standard detail drawings available to the public on demand.
Copies of the drawings are to be made available, when requested,
in accordance with the procedures in 120-408--Subpart (c)

(b) Each drawing provided is to include the following

information:
(1) A precautionary statement: STANDARDIZED DESIGNS - Must
be Adapted to the Specific Site
(2) The material design strength and quality assumptions.
(3) The site conditions assumed in the design.
(4) The name and address of the office in which the folder
containing design notes and computations is available.
536.06 National standard detail drawings.

(a) Standard detail drawings are prepared for structures,

spillways, and appurtenances. These drawings are prepared
according to hydraulic and structural design criteria in the NEH,
technical releases, or design notes. The drawings are prepared
to permit direct use without any significant change.

(b) The drawings may be prepared as a series to provide the

range of sizes frequently needed. The kind of structure and
range of sizes is to be determined by the Director of
Engineering.

(c) Drawings are available to the state design offices and

NTC's for use in preparing plans for specific structures.
Polyester transparencies of the detail drawings are to be
requested only as needed for each job. The original drawings are
to be kept on file in the Design Unit, Engineering Technology
Development Staff, National Headquarters. A duplicate set of
drawings, as listed in Technical Release No. 40, is to be
maintained on file in each NTC. Indexes of available standard
detail drawings are in Design Note 18.

536.07 NTC standard detail drawings.

(a) As approved by the Director of Engineering, NTC standard

detail drawings are to be prepared for structures and
appurtenances that would
(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)
536-3
 PART 536 – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

be usable by more than one state. These drawings are to be

complementary and supplementary to those provided nationally
(i.e., not replaced in kind). The drawings are to be prepared as
requested by state offices or initiated by the head of the NTC
engineering Staff to meet a common need.

(b) The folder containing the design notes and computations

made during the preparation of standard detail drawings is to be
kept on file for reference as long as the drawings are available.

(c) The NTC is to provide to the state offices a current index

of approved drawings.

536.08 4100 Series standard drop-spillway drawings.

(a) The 4100 Series standard drop spillway is an alternative to

the Type B series standard in NEH-11. The 4100 Series reference
is from index drawing 3-L-4100, issued by the Milwaukee Regional
Office and later reissued as drawing 5-N-4100.

(b) After the 4100 Series was issued, research revealed that
the tendency for scour to occur downstream from the apron
increases as the ratio of the depth of the weir to the height of
the headwall increases. Therefore, the 4100 Series is to be used
only if the ratio of weir depth to headwall height is lower than
0.5. (See NEH-11, Chapter 5, page 5.1.)

(c) Some 4100 Series structures have headwall extension lengths

less than that required by the criteria for Type B structures in
NEH-11. If metal is used as an alternative material for this
type of structure, the headwall extension lengths must meet the
minimum standards established for the Type B structure.

(d) The requirements of the site and the suitability of the

structure are to be verified before use.

536.09 State standard detail drawings.

(a) Standard detail drawings are to be prepared only for

structural appurtenances and details that are frequently used and
for which such drawings are not available nationally or through
the NTC. The design supporting the drawings is to be in
accordance with all SCS design procedures, criteria, and
materials specifications. The quality of drafting is to be
consistent with national and NTC drawings. Standard detail
drawings are not to be prepared to duplicate the kind or size of
either the national or the NTC drawings or to be equivalent to
them in purpose and function.

(b) The folder containing the design notes and computations

made during the preparation of these drawings is to be kept on
file for reference as long as the drawings are available.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

536-4
 PART 536 – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

(c) A current index of standard detail drawings prepared by a

state is to be maintained by that state. The head of the NTC
engineering Staff is to receive a copy of the index from each
state and distribute a consolidated index to the states in the
NTC work area, other NTC's, and the Director of Engineering.

(d) The index of state standard detail drawings is to contain

the following:
(1) Name or type of structure, structure element, or
appurtenance.
(2) State responsible for the design.
(3) Data of design.
(4) Location of folder containing design notes and
computations.
(5) Types of materials used in the structure or element, size
ranges, general application, and significant limiting
assumptions.
(6) Indication of whether or not the head of the NTC
engineering Staff has reviewed and concurred in the drawing.
(e) The state conservation engineer should review the NTC
consolidated index and, as appropriate, request from the
responsible state a copy of the desired standard detail drawing
When a standard detail drawing prepared by another state is
selected for use, a copy of the folder with design notes and
computation is to be obtained to support the use of the drawing.

(f) The use of state standard detail drawings in Class VI and

VII jobs is to be concurred in by the head of the NTC engineering
Staff. Concurrence may be obtained through agreements reached
during the designing of individual jobs (501.04 (c) of this
manual) or by a special review requested by the state
conservation engineer. A request for a special review is to be
accompanied by documentation indicating the frequency of the
drawings' use in Class VI and VII jobs.

536.10 Standard detail drawings prepared by non-SCS engineers.

(a) Standard detail drawings are prepared by other engineering

organizations, vendors, or fabricators. The drawings are for
structures and structural elements or appurtenances frequently
used in construction drawings for conservation practices and
systems but not portrayed in SCS standard detail drawings. The
design documentation supporting the drawings and the materials
used in the structures or appurtenances are to meet minimum SCS
criteria and should be of professional quality. Drafting is to
be professional.

(b) A folder of design notes and computations is to be

completed during the design and preparation of the drawing. The
folder is to be

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

536-5
 PART 536 – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

prepared professionally and must be of professional quality. The

folder is to be kept on file for reference as long as the drawing
is available for use.

(c) The state conservation engineer is to review and concur in

any use of standard detail drawings prepared by non-SCS
engineers. In conducting the review, the state conservation
engineer may request assistance from the NTC. Such requests are
to be accompanied by documentation indicating the frequency of
use and an estimate of the regional application of the drawing.
All drawings must be accompanied by a folder containing design
notes and computations.

(d) Use of standard detail drawings prepared by non-SCS

engineers in Class VI and VII jobs is to be concurred in by the
head of the NTC engineering Staff. Concurrence may be obtained
through agreements reached during the design process of the
individual job (501.04 (c) of this manual) or by a special review
requested by the state conservation engineer.

(e) An index of currently use standard detail drawings prepared

by non-SCS engineers is to be maintained by the state
conservation engineer. The head of the NTC engineering Staff is
to receive a copy of the index from each state and distribute a
consolidated index to states in the NTC areas, other NTC's, and
the Director of Engineering.

(f) The NTC's index of standard detail drawings prepared by

non-SCS engineers is to contain the following information:
(1) Name and type of structure, structural element, or
appurtenance.
(2) Name and address of designer.
(3) Name and address of the vendor, distributor, or
fabricator.
(4) Identifying name and number of the drawing.
(5) Date of original design and all revisions.
(6) Location of the folder containing design notes and
computations.
(7) Type of materials used in the structure or element, size
ranges, general application, and significant limiting
assumptions.
(8) Indication of whether or not the head of the NTC
engineering Staff has reviewed and concurred in the use of the
drawing.
(g) The state conservation engineer should review the NTC
consolidated index and, as appropriate, request from the state,
vendor, or fabricator a copy of the desired standard detail
drawing. When a standard detail drawing so obtained is to be
used, the state conservation engineer is to

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

536-6
 PART 536 – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

obtain a copy of the folder containing the design notes and

computations, including design assumptions that identify the
limitations for use of the structure or elements.

536.11 (Reserved.)
536.12 (Reserved.)
536.13 (Reserved.)
536.14 (Reserved.)
536.15 (Reserved.)
536.16 (Reserved.)
536.17 (Reserved.)
536.18 (Reserved.)
536.19 (Reserved.)

536.20 Design criteria for reinforced concrete.

(a) The structural design of reinforced concrete structures is

commonly guided by the ACI Standard, Building Code Requirements
for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 3l8) developed by Committee 3l8 of
the American Concrete Institute. This code covers the design and
construction of buildings. The code provides minimum
requirements and contains several precautions about special
attention needed when corrosive environments or other severe
exposure conditions exist. SCS uses reinforced concrete in
hydraulic structures for components of water resource projects.
These structures are often subject to severe exposure. Because
of the type of structure usually involved, design must often
exceed the minimums required by building codes.

(b) Concrete is to be designated by class. The class

corresponds to the compressive strength assumed in the design and
specified in construction. The class selected for use is to be
determined by evaluating the requirements for strength and
durability. The availability of materials and construction
quality control must also be recognized in making the
determination. The strength values normally used are 2,500,
3,000, 4,000, and 5,000 pounds per square inch (psi).

(c) With one exception contained in the criteria for waste

storage structures, structural design in reinforced concrete may
be carried out by either strength design or working stress design
methods.

(l) For waste storage structures, design is to be in

accordance with Practice Standard 3l3, Waste Storage Structure,
contained in the National Handbook of Conservation Practices.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

536-7
 PART 536 – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

(2) For Service hydraulic structures, the design yield

strength, fy, is to be taken as 40 kips per square inch (ksi) for
grade 40, grade 50, or grade 60 steels. The only exception to
this general requirement is for a special design at critical
locations where higher yield strengths will reduce excessive
congestion of reinforcement and the potential for accelerated
deterioration due to increased flexural cracking is acceptable.

(i) The strength design method is to be in accordance with

the requirements of Technical Release No. 67, Reinforced Concrete
Strength Design.

(ii) The working stress design method is to be in

accordance with requirements of NEH Section 6, Structural Design,
subsection 4, Reinforced Concrete, as updated by National
Engineering Handbook Notice 6-4.

(3) For other structures--with uncontrolled environments, the

design yield strength, fy, may be taken in accordance with the
grade of steel specified for construction.

(i) The strength design method is to be in accordance with

the requirements of Technical Release No. 67, Reinforced Concrete
Strength Design, except that temperature and shrinkage steel may
be in accordance with ACI Standard, Building Code Requirements
for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-77).

(ii) The working stress design method is to be in

accordance with the ACI Standard, Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-77), Appendix B - Alternate Design
Methods, except that the allowable extreme fiber stress in
compression is to be f’c = 0.40 fc and the Z factor controlling
flexural crack widths is not to exceed 145.

(4) For other structures--with controlled environments,

design is to be in accordance with the ACI Standard, Building
Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-77).

(d) The following additional criteria are to be used in the

design of Service hydraulic structures.
(1) Reinforcing steel is required in both faces and in both
(orthogonal) directions in all concrete slabs and walls, except
that only one grid of reinforcing steel is required in:

(i) concrete linings of trapezoidal channels, and

(ii) structures of Class V or less, as defined in 501.04 of

this manual, if authorized by the state conservation engineer
(SCE). If authorized by the SCE under this exception, a single
grid of steel reinforcement is permitted in slabs or walls having
a maximum thickness of 8 inches, provided the steel is positioned
approximately in the middle of the wall and strength and
durability requirements are satisfied.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

536-8
 PART 536 – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

(2) Redistribution of moments in continuous members is not

permitted in either:

(i) The strength design method when grade 50 or grade 60

steels are specified for construction and the design yield

strength, fy, is taken as 40 ksi, or

(ii) The working stress design method.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend. 3, May 1982)

536-9
 PART 537 - ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

537.00 General.

Environmental engineering is the application of engineering,

physical, and biological sciences to the protection and
improvement of air, land, and water resources to provide a clean
and healthful environment. Primary concerns are surface and
ground water quality waste management, and pollution abatement
in agricultural areas. Environmental engineering assistance is
to help land owners and operators comply with Federal, State,
and local laws, rules, and regulations governing air, land, and
water resources. SCS is not to assume a regulatory function.

537.01 SCS technical assistance for environmental engineering.

SCS is to provide technical information, guidelines, and

standards together with planning and design assistance to insure
that SCS activities protect and improve air, land, and water
resources. The effect of the quality of these resources on SCS-
assisted practices and projects is to be evaluated also. (See
Technical Release No. 58.) Assistance provided is to be in
conformance with the National Handbook of Conservation
Practices, National Conservation Manual, and provisions of the
General Manual.

(a) National Office. Engineering is to provide overall

guidance and leadership in environmental engineering through the
services of an environmental engineer at the National Office and
an environmental engineer on the National Engineering Staff.

(b) National Technical Centers. The NTC conservation

Technology staffs are to provide training, guidance, and
environmental engineering assistance to the states.

(c) State. States are to incorporate environmental

engineering principles in their planning, design, installation,
operation and maintenance, and environmental assessment
procedures on all SCS program. Each state is to assign
leadership in waste management activities to a member of the
state Staff. Each state is to assign water-quality coordination
responsibility to a member of the state Staff.

537.02 Non-SCS Environmental engineering services.

If SCS environmental engineers are not available, specialized

knowledge and experience not possessed by available personnel
are needed, or the environmental engineering workload is too
large for available personnel, the services of other government
agencies, educational institutions, and private firms or
individuals can be used for planning, design, supervision of
construction, and environmental assessments. This assistance is
to be in conformance with Part 505.
(210-V-NEM, Amend. 11, Oct 1986)
537-1
 SUBCHAPTER E – SUPPORT SERVICES

PART 540 - FIELD SURVEYS

540.00 General.
540.01 Format.
540.02 Precision and accuracy.
540.03 Staking.
540.04 Contractor surveys.
540.05 Checking.
540.06 Responsibility.

PART 541 - DRAFTING AND DRAWINGS

541.0 General.
541.1 Media.
541.2 Sheet Size.
541.3 Title Blocks.
541.4 Cover Sheet.
541.5 Orientation.
541.6 Style and Content.
541.7 Standard Title Block for ANSI A (8.5x11) Sheet.
541.8 Standard Title Block for ANSI B (11x17) and ANSI D
(22x34) Sheets.
541.9 Standard ANSI A (8.5x11) Sheet.
541.10 Standard ANSI D (22x34) and ANSI B (11x17) Sheets.

PART 542 - SPECIFICATIONS

SUBPART A - CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

542.00 General.
542.01 Scope.
542.02 Preparation of standard specifications.
542.03 Reference specifications.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 27, October 2004)

i
 SUBPART B - ENGINEERING SERVICES SPECIFICATIONS

542.10 General.
542.11 Technical Services.

SUBPART C - EXHIBIT

542.40 List of reference specifications.

PART 543 - MATERIALS

543.00 General.
543.01 Scope.
543.02 Preparation of material specifications.
543.03 Use of new materials.

PART 544 - EQUIPMENT

544.00 General.
544.01 Transporting equipment.
544.02 Adjustment and calibration.
544.03 Maintenance.
544.04 Storage.
544.05 State procedures.

PART 545 - ENGINEERING QUALITY ASSURANCE

(Reserved)

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 27, October 2004)

ii
 PART 540 – FIELD SURVEYS

540.00 General.

Concise, accurate, and legible engineering notes are necessary

to document planning, design, and construction. They support
expenditure of Federal and other funds for conservation
installations. Technical Release No. 62, Engineering Layout,
Notes, Staking and Calculations and Engineering Field Handbook,
Chapter 1, “Engineering Surveys” provide the recommended format
for engineering notes and related staking.

540.01 Format.

Each state conservationist is to establish, within this

framework, the format and minimum requirements for engineering
notekeeping. Engineering records are to be uniform to simplify
training and to improve clarity and overall efficiency. If local
contracting organizations elect to use their own engineering
staffs or if consulting engineers or other qualified persons do
the engineering, notekeeping must be of comparable quality and
similar content to the sample format in Technical Release No. 62.
When using electronic data collection systems to record survey
data, a method shall be developed to provide hardcopy
documentation of the recorded data.

(a) For Class V - VIII jobs and other major projects in which
work is usually performed by formal contract; or, if the notes
may be needed as supporting data in potential legal actions:

(1) Bound field notebooks shall be used to record

engineering surveys and notes when electronic data collection
systems are not used.

(2) When electronic data collection systems are used to

record the engineering surveys, an unaltered hardcopy of the
survey data shall be downloaded from the data collector and
permanently filed with the bound field notebook which contains
other important project survey information for that project.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend 24, December 1997)

540-1
 PART 540 – FIELD SURVEYS

(b) Loose-leaf notebooks, special forms, or hardcopies of

downloaded electronic data may be used for recording engineering
surveys, notes, and design data for on-farm conservation
practices (Class I - V jobs) such as ponds, terraces, diversions,
waterways, and animal waste management facilities. The
documentation for the engineering surveys for conservation
practices shall provide the minimum information as outlined in
the sample notes in Technical Release No. 62 in a format similar
to the sample.

540.02 Precision and accuracy.

The required precision and accuracy of each survey will vary

with its purpose; therefore, each state conservationist shall
establish the minimum requirements for precision and accuracy
within the framework outlined in Engineering Field Handbook.

§40.03 Staking.

(a) Basic stakes. Basic staking is defined as alignment and

grade stakes for structures other than embankments and channels.
For channels and embankments, basic staking includes alignment
and grade stakes plus slope stakes at the normal interval for the
work. Normal interval is 100-foot stations on tangents and may
decrease to as little as 25 feet on sharp curves. When
construction pay quantities are determined from basic staking, a
fair and equitable description of the ground surface is needed
for the calculation of performance quantities.

(b) Construction stakes. Additional stakes necessary for

forming the structure, constructing the slopes of embankments
above the slope stakes, or constructing the sides of channels
below the slope stakes or between stations are “construction”
stakes. They are the responsibility of the construction
contractor.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend 24, December 1997)

540-2
 PART 540 – FIELD SURVEYS

540.04 Contractor Surveys.

Contractor surveys are applicable to construction contracts

and conservation operations that require the Contractor to
provide basic staking; quantity surveys, measurements, and
computations for progress payments; and when authorized, provide
original and final surveys for final quantity determinations.
The National Engineering Handbook, Section 20, shall be used to
provide contract requirements for contractor surveys. Surveys
completed under conservation operations shall follow the
requirements of the Engineering Field Handbook, Chapter 1,
“Engineering Surveys”. Primary Controls, which include items
such as baselines, control points, and bench marks, shall be
sufficiently defined to allow the contractor to perform the
required surveys.

540.05 Checking.

NRCS employees or individuals under contract with NRCS are to

conduct quality assurance checking. Checking shall include the
visual review of survey markings, notes, and random surveys to
check for accuracy.

540.06 Responsibility.

The information from basic staking of embankments and channels

normally becomes the basis for measurement of quantities of
earthwork; therefore, it is to be done by NRCS, an A-E, the local
contracting organization, the owner, or the contractor as
prescribed within appropriate construction contracts, or the
General Manual.

(210-V-(NEM), Amend 24, December 1997)

540-3
 210 - National Engineering Manual

Part 541 – Drafting and Drawings

541.0 General

A. Engineering designs are normally described, displayed, and documented with

construction drawings. These drawings provide details of the location, content, and
dimensions of the components needed to complete the work.

B. Drawings need to communicate information clearly and effectively among designers,

reviewers, owners, and contractors at different locations. This requires uniformity and
consistency in drawing layout and style.

C. Drawings reflect the professional quality of NRCS engineering services to the owner,
contractor, and general public. Drawings should be legible, accurate, complete, and should
have a consistent appearance throughout the agency.

541.1 Media

A. Drawings can be developed by manual drafting techniques and/or computer aided design
(CAD) methods.

B. Paper is appropriate for most NRCS conservation work. More durable medium such as
vellum or mylar should be considered for standard drawings that will be reused repeatedly, or
for drawings that need to be retained for many years.

C. CAD files should be saved on media appropriate for retention period shown in NRCS
Records Management Guide. Permanent record files should be upgraded to newer, more
durable media as technology evolves.

541.2 Sheet Size

A. Drawing sheet size should be appropriate for presentation of required information in a

neat and uncluttered manner.

B. Standard size sheets for NRCS work will be as follows:

(1) Full size, 22 inches by 34 inches, ANSI D size.

(2) Half size, 11 inches by 17 inches, ANSI B size.

(3) Page size, 8.5 inches by 11 inches, ANSI A size.

C. Normally, full size sheets should be used for projects involving large land areas or
complex structures. Half size sheets should be used for smaller, simpler work. Page size
sheets should be limited to simple details.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 27, October 2004)

541-1
 210 - National Engineering Manual

D. Other size paper may be used for NRCS work as needed to facilitate local paper supply
availability and special plotting, copying, or reproduction equipment limitations.

541.3 Title Blocks

A. Each sheet in a set of construction drawings shall have a title block to identify the
drawing and provide other information about the drawing. Location data including State,
County, Township, Section or similar information shall be included in each title block.

B. Full and half size drawing sheets shall have a vertical title block on the right side of the
sheet. Page size sheets shall have horizontal title blocks across the bottom of the sheet.

C. The standard title blocks for NRCS work shown in 541.07 through 541.10 shall be used
for all new drawings or drawing forms prepared by NRCS.

D. Alternative title blocks can be used or added for work prepared by other agencies, local
organizations, or private firms. Such alternate title blocks shall contain at least the same
drawing identity and other information as contained on the NRCS standard title block.

541.4 Cover Sheet

A. Each set of construction drawings consisting of more than five sheets shall have a cover
sheet showing the name and location of the project, the names of the sponsoring agencies or
owners, an index of the drawings, space for approval signatures, and professional seals as
appropriate.

B. The cover sheet for major, long lasting NRCS work such as dams and channels may also
include a location map, general notes, and project data.

541.5 Orientation

A. Maps should be drawn with north toward the top of the sheet. If this orientation is not
feasible, the map should be drawn with north toward the left. A north arrow shall be shown
on all maps.

B. Layout drawings (plan view) should be drawn so that the direction of flow is from left to
right or bottom to top of the sheet. A north arrow and flow arrow indicating direction of flow
shall be shown.

C. Cross section and elevation views of structures representing surfaces essentially parallel
to the direction of the stream flow should be drawn so that flow is from left to right.

D. Cross section and elevation views representing surfaces essentially normal to flow should
be drawn so that they are viewed looking downstream. If such orientation makes the drawing
unclear, it may be changed and the orientation labeled on the drawing. For example,
orientation could be labeled as “Looking Upstream”.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 27, October 2004)

541-2
 210 - National Engineering Manual

E. Stationing on open channels can be stationed upstream or downstream, depending on local

practice, design software, or existing drawings.

F. Multiple cross sections on a sheet should be arranged sequentially according to stationing.

G. Orientation of views and directions of stationing shall be consistent throughout the

drawing set.

541.6 Style and Content

A. Drawings should present as much related information as reasonable on the same sheet for
efficiency and clarity. If possible, details should be drawn on the same sheet as the work to
which they apply. If details are shown on a separate sheet, appropriate sheet references
should be noted. Dimensions and sizes of components should be shown on the drawings
rather than referenced to the specifications.

B. Drawings shall follow agency and industry standards for content, appearance, details, and
symbols to best communicate requirements to reviewers, contractors, and the building trades.
Standards include:

(1) American Concrete Institute (ACI)

ACI 315 – Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement

ACI 315R – Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced

Concrete Structures

(2) American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

AISC – Manual of Steel Construction

(3) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME Y14.1 to Y14.5 – Drawings, Dimensions, etc.

(4) Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS)

National Digital Geospatial Map Symbols Handbook, Title 170, Part 601

(5) National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS)

U.S. National CAD Standard, Version 2.0

C. Scales for drawings should be selected carefully to assure clarity of details and
accommodate reduced size reproductions. Bar scales are preferred for maps and plan views
and are necessary for any drawings that will be reduced for contracting.

D. The minimum scale for structural drawings should be: ¼ inch equals 1 foot for layout
sheets, 3/8 inch equals 1 foot for reinforcing steel sheets, and ½ inch equals 1 foot for any
sheets that will be reduced. Drawings that will be reduced shall include bar or graphic scales,

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 27, October 2004)

541-3
 210 - National Engineering Manual

or each reduced sheet shall bear a prominent warning note stating that the drawing is a
reduced size and the indicated scales are not accurate.

E. Notes on the drawings should be limited to those required for complete and accurate
description of the drawings and those required to supplement the contract specifications.

F. All lines and letters must be clear, sharp, and dense to ensure clear reproductions and one-
half scale reductions. Manually drafted letters shall be single stroke type.

G. Drawings should include geographic location information. Routine work should show at
least a simple location map containing readily identifiable landmarks. Major work should
include structure reference lines and right-of-way limits referenced to fixed and readily
identifiable geographical points.

H. Drawings should include geologic and soils information where available. Boring
numbers, station and offset of borings, waterline depth and date of waterline, and soil
classification at various depths can be displayed on cross section and profile views.

I. Drawings should include survey information, i.e. benchmark location, data and datum
used, where available.

541.7 Standard Title Block for ANSI A (8.5x11) Sheet

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 27, October 2004)

541-4
 210 - National Engineering Manual

541.8 Standard Title Block for ANSI B (11x17) and ANSI D (22x34) Sheets

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 27, October 2004)

541-5
 210 - National Engineering Manual

541.9 Standard ANSI A (8.5x11) Sheets

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 27, October 2004)

541-6
 210 - National Engineering Manual

541.10 Standard ANSI D (22x34) and ANSI B (11x17) Sheets

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 27, October 2004)

541-7
 PART 542 - SPECIFICATIONS

SUBPART A - CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

542.00 General.

(a) NRCS uses standard construction specifications as a tool

to ensure consistency and efficiency with the many contracts
administered through various programs.

(b) Many types of engineering works have elements that recur

as an installation or material quality requirement. These
elements can be incorporated into a standard specification that
can be supplemented for a specific project and be included as
part of the contract. The content of the standard specification
will be developed and maintained in a manner that ensures
adherence to state laws and NRCS regulations and prevents
conflict with other contract provisions.

542.01 Scope.

(a) Specifications are to be developed as outlined in NEH-20

and incorporated in all contracts prepared for installing works
of improvement when the NRCS provides assistance, except:

(1) Contracts for basic recreation facilities.

(2) Separate contracts for seeding, sodding, or fencing.

(3) Contracts for less complex works of improvement shall

have design drawings and specifications of sufficient detail to
support quality installation and reflect the intent of the
designer in solving resource concerns. The adequacy of the
drawings and specifications shall be as determined by the
responsible engineer or employee with the level of engineering
approval authority necessary for the conservation practice or
structure to be applied.

(210 V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

542-1
 PART 542 - SPECIFICATIONS

(4) Contracts for works of improvement not designed by

NRCS and installed under contracts administered by the project
sponsors without using standard NRCS Construction and Material
Specifications. This arrangement may occur when sponsors design
or hire the engineering design and the NRCS retains quality
assurance responsibilities.

(b) Sponsoring local organizations that prepare their own

designs for NRCS assisted projects are encouraged to use the
NRCS standard specifications. The specifications must be
compatible with all other provisions in the contract document.
The specifications selected or developed for a specific contract
must provide the necessary construction details that result in
the installation of a quality product equivalent to that
expected from using the NRCS standard specifications.

(c) Agreements and contracts for engineering services for

preparing designs must include the applicable requirements
pertaining to the construction and material specifications.

§542.02 Preparation of standard specifications.

(a) Procedures for preparing specifications for construction

contracts are outlined in NEH-20, Chapter 1, Discussion.
Standard specifications for construction are located NEH-20 in
Chapter 2 and those for materials in Chapter 3.

(b) The standard specifications are to be utilized verbatim,

except for the deletion of alternative methods that do not apply
to the project as described in NEH-20 Instructions.

(c) Standard specifications will be revised and issued

through the NRCS Conservation Engineering Division and will be
effective immediately. The State Conservation Engineer will
determine applicability of specifications developed.

(d) The development of a new specification at the state

level is the responsibility of the State Conservation Engineer
and will be issued as an interim specification. All interim

(210 V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

542-2
 PART 542 - SPECIFICATIONS

specifications have a use life of three (3) years following

their issue date. After the use life has elapsed, interim
specifications are to be evaluated for issuance as a national
specification. State experience and recommendations are to be
provided for evaluation and acceptance as national specification
by the NRCS Conservation Engineering Division.

542.03 Reference specifications.

(a) Reference specifications are those specifications

developed and issued by other agencies, associations, societies,
or institutes, and are cited in NRCS Standard Specifications,
National Handbook of Conservation Practices, and the National
Engineering Handbook Section 19, Construction Inspection.

(b) The State Conservation Engineer shall develop a system

to maintain all current reference specifications cited in NRCS
Standard Specifications, National Handbook of Conservation
Practices, and NEH-Section 19, as noted in Part 210-542.40.

(c) Other NRCS engineering staffs designated by the State

Conservation Engineer are to maintain, or have direct access to,
copies of reference specifications as noted in Part 210-542.40.

(d) The National Cartographic and Geospacial Center (NCGC)

Staff at the NRCS Fort Worth, Texas office will annually
coordinate the delivery of current ASTM reference specifications
to all States, the Caribbean Area, and the Pacific Basin Area.
Each year a revised index of updated and new ASTM reference
specifications will be made available.

(1) Each State Conservation Engineer will maintain a file

of current reference specifications that have been identified
for use in NRCS assistance projects.

(2) Copies of ASTM reference specifications not on the

current index, will be available upon request from the NCGC in
Fort Worth, Texas.

(210 V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

542-3
 PART 542 - SPECIFICATIONS

(3) Guidance to obtain other reference specifications,

AWWA, ACI, etc. will be developed and provided in a manner
similar to ASTM Reference Specifications.

(e) Additional copies of reference specifications for non-

NRCS use should be obtained from the organization that owns the
specification or from other sources that may be available.

(f) Reference specifications that are outdated shall be

removed from the reference file at the time a revised or updated
version is received. All specific construction contract
reference specifications should remain with the completed “As-
Built” file where they were utilized.

(210 V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

542-4
 PART 542 - SPECIFICATIONS

SUBPART B - ENGINEERING SERVICES SPECIFICATIONS

542.10 General

(a) The NRCS provides engineering assistance for many

programs. The need to obtain technical assistance from other
sources occasionally occurs for various reasons, including:

(1) Resources are not available to meet commitments; and

(2) A specialty area expertise is not available within

the agency.

542.11 Technical Services

(a) Technical expertise in differing subject areas may be

needed to assist the NRCS in meeting program commitments. This
assistance would generally be considered in one of the
following:

(1) Professional services; or

(2) Architectural and Engineering (A&E) services.

(b) Procurement for the above listed services shall be in

accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulations, the
Department of Agriculture Acquisition Regulations, and the
Natural Resources Conservation Service Acquisition Regulations
(formally SCSAR’s), as applicable. Technical requirements for
the procurement shall be developed and included in the contract
provisions and/or specifications.

(c) For service contracts, clear and concise requirements

must be outlined.

(d) The State Conservation Engineer, together with the

Contracting Officer, shall develop review procedures for A & E
Contracts.

(210 V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

542-5
 PART 542 - SPECIFICATIONS

SUBPART C - EXHIBIT

542.40 List of Reference Specifications

An index that includes the designation, current issue date,

and title of reference specifications will be maintained by each
state conservation engineer. These are the specifications
referenced in NRCS NEH Section 19, Construction Inspection; and
NEH Section 20, Construction and Material Specifications; and
the National Handbook of Conservation Practices.

Each State Conservation Engineer shall provide a current

Index of Reference Specifications to all offices and individuals
assigned a National Engineering Manual. Copies of the
specifications are to be distributed as needed to provide
guidance on installation procedures and to establish minimum
material quality requirements.

Only the most current copy of each reference specification

should be used for contract purposes. Care should be taken to
avoid the potential use of obsolete or out-of-date
specifications.

Reference Specifications that may be listed in this section

could include, but not limited to:

American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM

American Concrete Institute - ACI
American National Standards Institute - ANSI
American Water Works Association - AWWA
American Welding Society - AWS
Military Specifications
Product Standards
Steel Structures Painting Council
United States Department of the Interior, Bureau of
Reclamation

(210 V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

542-6
 PART 543 – MATERIALS

543.00 General.

A variety of materials are used to install NRCS assisted

works of improvement. The quality of the materials used must be
adequate to ensure satisfactory performance for the project’s
expected service life. The selection of materials shall include
the public’s health and welfare as a consideration.

543.01 Scope

The total cost of installing, operating, and maintaining a

conservation practice and/or system should be compared to the
benefits expected to be generated. All materials used must be
compatible with site conditions, intended purpose, and normal
expected O&M so that installations will provide satisfactory
service to the owner.

543.02 Preparation of Material Specifications

(a) In the absence of standard material specifications, the

preparation of project specific material specifications may be
required. Industry is continuing to develop new materials and
to improve on existing materials. The need to maintain our
technical skills will include the incorporation of new methods
and materials in the service provided by the NRCS.

(b) Special material specifications should describe the

minimum physical, quality, and/or functional requirements
expected of the product or material. The functional
requirements may include minimum test data results necessary to
conform to the specification. The inclusion of a material
product by name or other similar type of identification should
be avoided. If the product name is included, it should be
specifically noted that the reference by product name is
intended to establish minimum material requirements only and not
intended to support and promote a specific company or product by
name.

(210 – V- Amend. 23, September 1997)

543-1
 PART 543 – MATERIALS

543.03 Use of New Materials

(a) New materials are available for incorporation into

conservation practices and project works of improvement. The
decision to use a new material that may impact the cost or
design life of a structure or practice shall be documented.
Responsibility for the selection, evaluation, and decision to
use a new material shall be as follows:

(1) Low and Intermediate Hazard Structures - The engineer

with engineering design approval authority.

(2) High Hazard Structures - The State Conservation

Engineer.

(b) When a new material may have regional or national

applicability, an evaluation team should be assembled. The
request for an evaluation team should be made by the State
Conservation Engineer to the Regional Conservationist or
Director of the Conservation Engineering Division, as
appropriate. Evaluation teams shall make recommendations for
the use of new materials, including any limitations or
restrictions. Trial installations and monitoring plans may be
recommended.

(c) It is important that information regarding the use of a

new material be made available to others within NRCS and to
agency partners. Dissemination of information shall be
coordinated by the State Conservation Engineer, regional
specialist, or the Director of the Conservation Engineering
Division, as appropriate.

(210 – V- Amend. 23, September 1997)

543-2
 PART 544 - EQUIPMENT

544.00 General.

Much of the equipment utilized to collect data, test

materials, and store samples is sensitive to vibration, weather
or other environmental conditions. It is essential that all
equipment be maintained, transported, and stored properly. Extra
care to handle equipment properly and in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations will help to ensure data is
collected accurately, test results are correct, and down time
because of inoperable equipment is reduced. Special training in
the proper handling of specialty equipment, such as nuclear
moisture and moisture/density gauges, may be required by
agreements with regulatory agencies.

544.01 Transporting equipment.

Sensitive equipment, such as levels, transits, theodolites and

especially the modern electronic survey equipment requires
special handling and transporting. It is essential that all
equipment be maintained, transported, and stored properly and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. All
equipment should be transported in proper containers in order to
minimize problems associated with vibration and sudden stops.
Special arrangements need to be followed in the handling and
transporting of equipment that contain nuclear energy sources.
The requirements provided by the equipment manufacturer and all
terms and conditions of applicable agreements in the acquisition
and utilization of nuclear gauges shall be followed.

544.02 Adjustment and calibration.

All equipment utilized to collect data for designs and to

provide installation quality assurance shall be checked
frequently to ensure accurate information is being obtained. All
engineering survey equipment shall be checked, calibrated, and
adjusted at least annually. Adjustment of equipment should be
made only by those who have a full understanding of the care and
maintenance of the equipment. Checking of instruments shall be

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

544-1
 PART 544 - EQUIPMENT

in accordance with procedures outlined in the Engineering Field

Handbook, Chapter 1, and/or the manufacturer’s recommendations.

544.03 Maintenance.

All equipment shall be kept in good working order.

Maintenance instructions provided by the manufacturer and other
pertinent information shall be located in the Engineering Field
Handbook and must be followed.

544.04 Storage

All equipment is to be stored in a clean, dry condition as

recommended by the manufacturer. Specialty equipment, such as
nuclear gauges, may have further requirements that may concern
location, security, and signage.

544.05 State procedures.

(a) Each state is to develop specific procedures for ensuring

proper care and maintenance of engineering equipment, including
storage and carrying cases. The procedures should outline the
minimum skills needed to operate the equipment and what specific
guidelines must be follow during usage.

(b) Information about the proper cleaning, maintenance, and

repairs should be provided each office. If the state has an
individual(s) with equipment operation and maintenance
responsibilities, his/her name(s) and telephone number should be
provided to the appropriate offices within the state.

(210-V-NEM, Amend. 23, September 1997)

544-2
 500 - Introductions NEM -Table of Content A

501 - Authorizations NEM - Table of Content B

502 - Responsibilities NEM - Table of Content C

503 - Safety NEM - Table of Content D

504 - Investigation Reports NEM - Table of Content E

506 - Dam Safety NEM - Table of Content

Primary
511 - Design NEM - Spreadsheet

513 - Operation & Maint NEM - Foreword

520 - Resource Develop NEM - Circular #1

524 - Drainage 510 - Planning

531 - Geology 505 - Non-NRCS Engineer

533 - Soil Mechanics 512 - Construction

534 - Hydraulics 521 - Water Quality

535 - Landscape Architect 522 - Water Supply &

Conservation
536 - Structural Engineer 523 - Irrigation

537 - Environmental Eng 525 - Restoration

540 – Field Surveys 526 - Storm Water Mgmt

541 - Drafting 527 - Wetlands

542 - Specifications 528 - Dams

543 - Materials 529 - Air Quality

544 - Equipment 530 - Hydrology

545 - Engineer Material 532 – Biological &

Agriculture Engineering